Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 148

VOLUME IV - CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

2022 EDITION
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4100 SITEWORK

SECTION 4105 – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

1.01 GENERAL
The purpose of these criteria is to provide uniform specifications for erosion and sediment control
measures, including, materials, installation, and maintenance. This Section is not all inclusive for
erosion and sediment control issues. For topics not specifically addressed in this Section or in
KC-APWA Section 2150 – “Erosion and Sediment Control, the Missouri Department of Natural
Resources field guide entitled, Protecting Water Quality, and the Johnson County Kansas Erosion
Prevention and Sediment Control Field Guide shall be used as references.
A. Specifications to be Used: All temporary erosion and sediment control shall be installed
and maintained in accordance with Division II – Construction and Material Specifications,
Section 2150 – Erosion and Sediment Control published by the Kansas City Metropolitan
Chapter of the American Public Works Association except as amended below.

1.02 REFERENCE
The following standards are directly referenced in this section. The latest version of these
standards shall be used.
A. APWA, Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter (KC-APWA):
1. Section 2150 – “Erosion and Sediment Control”
B. ASTM:
1. D3786 – Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics – Diaphragm
Bursting Strength Tester Method
2. D4355 – Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and
Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus

1.03 AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS


The following amendments and modifications shall apply to Erosion and Sediment Control.
A. Section 2153.5.B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“B. Construction Requirements
Preparation, planting and all other construction requirements for temporary seeding shall be
as specified for permanent seeding in Section 2400, except as modified herein. Temporary
seeding shall be drilled (see 2153.8 for hydraulic application of temporary seed). Prior to
application, the soil shall be tilled to a depth of at least 2 inches and gullies, depressions, and
large clods eliminated. Roller compaction of the seedbed is not required. Within 24 hours of
seeding, mulch or erosion control blankets shall be applied. When mulch is used, it shall be
applied in accordance with the same requirements given for “Mulch Cover” in subsection
2153.6. When erosion control blankets are used, they shall be installed in accordance with
the requirements in subsection 2153.9. The Contractor shall initially water all areas of
temporary seeding thoroughly as soon as the mulch is laid. Additional watering may be
necessary for plant germination and adequate growth to provide cover. Contractor shall
schedule work so as to provide temporary seeding as early as practical in the construction
process. Contractor shall maintain a readiness to perform temporary seeding frequently

Division 4100 Sitework 4105 - 1


Section 4105 Erosion and Sediment Control 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

during the progress of the project. No more than 7 calendar days shall elapse between the
City’s request for temporary seeding and its application. Multiple mobilizations to seed areas
as construction progresses shall be expected.”
B. Section 2153.5.C: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“C. Maintenance
Mulch shall be replaced or repaired as needed during germination and early growth. Reseed
areas that do not exhibit growth within fourteen (14) days after rain or watering. Bare spots
shall be patched, by hand seeding as necessary. Vehicle and personnel traffic shall be
minimized in areas seeded.”
C. Section 2153.5.D: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“D. Measurement and Payment:
"Temporary Seeding" will be plan measured per acre or hundredth part thereof and paid for
at the contract unit price. No differentiation shall be made for type of temporary seed used.
Mulch, watering, and other appurtenant work shall not be measured or paid for separately on
any temporary seeding, but all such costs shall be subsidiary to the item. Erosion control
blankets, when used, will be measured and paid separately as “Erosion Control Blanket.”
D. Section 2154.5B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“D. Measurement and Payment:
Silt fence will be field measured by the linear foot and will be paid for at the contract unit price
for “Silt Fence”. Initial excavation of depressions on the upstream side of silt fence to create
added storage as well as trenching, stakes, staples, and other appurtenant work shall be
subsidiary.”
E. Section 2154.14: In addition to the inlet protection devices listed, gravel bags may be used
and shall conform to the construction documents and the following specifications:
1. Products:
(a) Bags: Bags shall be woven synthetic or natural burlap with a minimum weight of four
(4) ounces per square yard. The Mullen burst strength shall exceed three hundred
(300) psi inch per ASTM D3786 and shall have an ultraviolet stability exceeding
seventy percent (70%) per ASTM D4355.
(b) Gravel: Gravel shall be a clean, coarse aggregate from one-half (1/2) inch to one (1)
inch in diameter.
(c) Bags shall be approximately eighteen (18) inches long, twelve (12) inches wide, and
three (3) inches thick with a weight of thirty (30) to thirty-five (35) pounds when loosely
filled.
2. Execution:
(a) Installation: Bags shall be placed tightly together with no gaps between individual bags
or adjacent curbs, walls or other surfaced against which they are placed.
(b) Maintenance: Sediment that is stopped by and stored behind the bag shall be removed
after every rainfall.
3. Measurement and Payment: Gravel bags shall be considered subsidiary to new inlet
installation. If gravel bags are required for sediment control for existing inlets the gravel
bags shall be field measured to the nearest linear foot and paid at the Contract unit price.

Division 4100 Sitework 4105 - 2


Section 4105 Erosion and Sediment Control 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

F. Lump Sum Payment Option: A lump sum payment option may be specified for part or all of
erosion and sediment control mechanisms. If this option is used installation, maintenance,
cost of materials, repair, and all appurtenant work are considered subsidiary to the lump sum
payment.

END OF SECTION

Division 4100 Sitework 4105 - 3


Section 4105 Erosion and Sediment Control 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4100 SITEWORK

SECTION 4110 – GRADING AND SITE PREPARATION

1.01 GENERAL
This section covers the performance of all clearing, grubbing, demolition, and salvaging of
materials at the locations shown within the construction documents. It also covers the grading
and compaction of excavations, embankments, structural foundations, and planted areas, as well
as trenching and backfill for storm sewers and appurtenant work. Utility crossings within the
Rights-of-Way are also included.
A. Specifications to be Used: All grading and site preparation shall be performed in
accordance with the Division II – Construction and Material Specifications, Section 2100 –
Grading and Site Preparation published by the Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter of the
American Public Works Association except as amended below.
B. The Contractor shall assure that the pipe embedment and backfill of the pipe shall be done
in the presence of the City Engineer or their representative. Any backfilling done in violation
of this provision shall be cause for removal and replacement at the expense of the
Contractor, even though the work may be in accordance with these Specifications.
C. For utility installations other than storm sewer, the trenching and backfilling activities shall
conform to the specific utility’s technical specifications or as shown within the Construction
Documents.
D. Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate
precautions being taken against all hazards. Trench Excavations shall provide adequate
working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein. In no case shall
excavation faces be undercut for extending footings. Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and
free of loose material of any kind when concrete is placed thereon.
E. Backfilling during freezing weather shall not be done except by permission of the Engineer.
No backfill materials shall be placed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow,
or ice be placed in any backfill.

1.02 REFERENCE
The following standards are directly referenced in this section. The latest version of these
standards shall be used.
A. APWA, Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter (KC-APWA):
1. Section 2100 – “Grading and Site Preparation”
2. Section 2150 – “Erosion and Sediment Control”
B. ASTM:
1. A 36/A 36M – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2. D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 1


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. APWA, Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter (KC-APWA):
1. Proctor Analysis
2. In-Place Density
3. Atterberg Limits

1.04 AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS


The following amendments and modifications shall apply to Grading and Site Preparation.
A. Section 2101.3.E: This definition shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“E. Trees: Vegetative matter twelve (12) inches in diameter or larger, measure three (3) feet
off the ground shall be classified as a tree.”
B. Section 2101.4: The following items shall be added to this section:
“P. Salvaged Items
The Contractor shall carefully remove and stockpile, public and private improvements such
as roadway signs, streetlights, traffic signals, mail boxes, landscape material, lawn
ornaments, and other miscellaneous items as indicated within the Construction Documents.
All Items noted to be replaced shall be reset as close as practical to original location and
condition. Mailboxes shall be reset in accordance with U.S postal regulations. All traffic
control devices shall be reset in conformance with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices and the SDCM. Private property not designated to be reset or replaced shall be
neatly stored on the property owners land.
Q. Pipe Removal
All pipe shall be removed to the limits indicated within the Construction Documents. The
Contractor shall take every precaution to avoid breaking or damaging adjoining pipes, which
are to remain. The Contractor shall be held responsible for replacing all damaged pipe at his
or her own expense. All damaged pipe shall be replaced with the same type, grade, and class
as exists.”
C. Section 2101.4.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Erosion and Sediment Control
Comply with KC-APWA Section 2150 “Erosion and Sediment Control” and Shawnee Design
and Construction Manual Volume IV Section 4105 “Erosion and Sediment control.”
If the erosion control measures are not in place to the satisfaction of the City Engineer, then
all clearing, grubbing, and other site work shall be halted until such time as the erosion control
measures are deemed acceptable.”
D. Section 2101.4.I: This section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“I. Disposal of Materials
All materials with the exception of those which are designated for salvage or which are used
in the embankment in conformance with this specification, shall become the Contractor’s
property and shall be disposed of by Contractor, outside the project limits at a site as
approved by the Owner, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. The disposal of waste and
excess excavated materials, including hauling, handling, grading, and surfacing shall be a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 2


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

When authorized by the Fire Department, the Contractor may dispose of such refuse by
burning on the project site, provided all requirements as determined by the Fire Marshal are
met. Under no circumstances shall the authorization to burn on the site relieve the Contractor
in any way from damages which may result from the burning operations. In no case shall any
burnt remnants or ash be left on the project site, shoved onto abutting properties, or buried
in embankments or trenches on the site.”
E. Section 2101.4.K: This section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“K. Items to be Left in Place
Removal of existing concrete pavement, curb and gutter, and similar infrastructure to the
limits shown shall be full depth saw cut prior to removal except as follows that will require
removal to the nearest joint:
1. Driveways: Removal limits are within six (6) feet of a joint.
2. Curb and Gutter: Removal limits are within two (2) feet of a joint.
3. Sidewalks and Recreational Trails: Removal to nearest joint or as directed by the City
Engineer.
The saw cut joint shall be to true line and vertical face. Sufficient portions of these objects
shall be removed to provide for the proper grading and construction of the new work.”
F. Section 2102.2: The following shall be added to this section:
“D. Steel Plates:
Steel Plates for temporary traffic support shall be ASTM A36 structural steel, minimum three-
quarter (3/4) inch thick and of sufficient length and width to provide adequate bearing surface
on solid pavement.”
G. Section 2102.2.B.1: This definition shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“1. Unclassified Excavation
Unclassified excavation is defined as the grading, excavation, hauling, removal, and disposal
of all material encountered regardless of its nature, including rock and weathered shale
unless defined as rock excavation. All material excavated shall be considered “unclassified”
unless the Construction Documents state otherwise.”
H. Section 2102.2.B.2: This definition shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“1. Rock Excavation
Rock excavation is defined as the removal of sandstone, limestone, non-weathered shale, or
other similar materials, that in the opinion of the Engineer, require the means of blasting,
ramming, or drilling to be removed.”
I. Section 2102.2.K: This definition shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“K. Structures
Structures as used in this Section refer to bridges (including foundations and abutments),
culverts (including headwalls and wingwalls), basins, storm and/or sanitary sewer structures,
retaining walls, and similar improvements. See KC-APWA Section 2700 “Structures” for other
structures.”
J. Section 2102.3: The following shall be added to this section:
“N. Maintaining Drainage

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 3


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining positive and sufficient drainage at all
times during the grading operations. Soft spots that develop during grading operations
resulting from, in the opinion of the Engineer, the failure of the Contractor to maintain proper
drainage shall be removed. The area shall then be backfilled with suitable material and
compacted to obtain the required density. No additional payment shall be made to the
Contractor for this work.
O. Tolerances
Grading, excavation, and backfilling for all improvements, shall be made to the lines, grades,
and cross sections indicated within the Construction Documents. Areas shall be cut or filled
to within one-tenth (0.1) foot of the approved subgrade elevation.
P. Undergrading
Undergrading is required when unsuitable materials, as determined by the Engineer, are
found during the excavation process. The Contractor shall remove the unsuitable and/or
unstable materials to a minimum depth of eighteen (18) inches or to the depth required by
the Engineer, whichever is greater. The area involved shall then be backfilled with suitable
material as determined by the Engineer and compacted to obtain the required density.”
K. Section 2102.3.I: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“I. Rock encountered within the full width of the Right-of-Way, toe of slope to toe of slope,
shall be undergraded to an elevation of 6 inches below the finished subgrade elevation or to
the depth required by the Engineer, whichever is greater. Care shall be taken to avoid
overshooting when blasting. Rock shall be removed in such a manner as to leave no
excessive water pockets in the surface.”
L. Section 2102.3.J: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“J. Blasting
Any blasting shall be approved by the City Engineer and Fire Marshal. When blasting the
contractor shall use the utmost care to protect life and property.
1. The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, applicable safety code
requirements, and regulations relative to the handling, storage, and use of explosives
and the protection of life and property. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage
caused by his or his subcontractor’s blasting operations. Suitable methods shall be
employed to confine all materials lifted by blasting within the limits of the excavation or
trench.
2. The Contractor shall not blast any rock or other materials or allow the same to be done
in prosecution of the work unless he secures proper insurance coverage and a blasting
permit from the Fire Marshal, as required by the Uniform Fire Code as adopted by
reference in the Shawnee Municipal Code.
3. All excavated rock which cannot be handled and compacted and meet the requirements
of this section shall be kept separate from other excavated materials and shall not be
mixed with suitable backfill or embankment materials, except as specified on the
Contract Documents or directed by the Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall provide insurance as required by the Contract Documents before
performing any blasting. The governing agency shall be notified at least 24 hours before
blasting operations begin.”
M. Section 2102.4.A: The following shall be added to this section:

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 4


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

“6. When all practical attempts to dewater an excavation have been exhausted, the method
for stabilizing the trench bottom shall be determined by the Engineer.”
N. Section 2102.4.A.3: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“3. Excavations shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the ground water level beneath
such excavations twelve (12) inches or more below the bottom of the excavation. Proper
dewatering techniques are the Contractor's responsibility. All work performed by the
Contractor that is adversely affected by his/her failure to adequately dewater trenches will be
subject to rejection by the Engineer. The Contractor shall repair and/or replace affected
structures or pipelines.”
O. Section 2102.4.B: The following shall be added to this section:
“9. Sheeting and Shoring
The contractor shall brace and shore all trenches in full accordance with all current
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations.”
10. Stabilization
Trench bottoms shall be firm, dense and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be
free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under the
feet of a worker. Where the trench bottom at planned installation grade of pipelines is judged
by the Engineer to be unstable, the trench shall be overexcavated as directed and backfilled
to the pipe bedding elevation with pipe embedment material as specified below and
compacted to form a stable trench bottom. Removal of over-excavated material shall be
subsidiary to the price bid for pipe.
11. Trench bottoms or subgrades which become soft or collect muck due to construction
operations, shall be cleaned out prior to addition of embedment material. Any loss of elevation
or embedment shall be made up by adding additional layers of clean rock.
12. Not more than one-half (1/2) inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on
stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe embedment material is placed thereon.
13. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operations
would cause damage to trees, buildings, or other existing property, utilities, or structures
above or below ground; in all such locations, hand-excavating tools and methods shall be
used. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type that allows the
bottom elevation to be controlled and uniform trench widths and vertical side walls to be
maintained. Undercutting of the trench sidewall to obtain the required side clearance will not
be permitted. All mechanical trenching equipment, its operating condition, and the manner of
its operation, shall be subject to the approval of the City Engineer.”
P. Section 2102.4.C: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“C. Trench Widths
Trenches shall be excavated to a width that will provide adequate working space and pipe
clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. Over-excavation shall be
replaced with granular bedding material or flowable backfill. See applicable Plans, Standard
Drawings, and manufacturers’ recommendations for trench widths for pipe installations.
1. The minimum clear distance from ledge rock, boulders, and large stones below and on
any side of all pipe shall be six (6) inches. These distances are minimum clear distances
which will be permitted between any part of the pipe and appurtenances being laid on
any part, projection, or point of such rock, boulder, or stone.

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 5


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be
permitted only in areas where the increased trench width will not interfere with surface
features or encroach on Right-of-Way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one (1)
foot above the top of the pipe.”
Q. Section 2102.4.J.2: This section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“2. Standard Trench: Suitable backfill material for trenches between 24 to 48 inches wide
shall be flowable backfill (CLSM).”
R. Section 2102.4.J.3: This section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“3. Wide Trench: Suitable Backfill Material for trenches greater than 48 inches wide shall be
flowable backfill.”
S. Section 2102.4.O.6.a: This section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“a. Backfill against cast-in-place structures shall not begin until eighty percent (80%) of the
twenty-eight (28) day design strength of the concrete has been reached. Additionally, backfill
shall not be placed against cast-in-place structure until the minimum required curing period
has elapsed, in conformance with Section 4405 – Cast in Place Concrete.”
T. Section 2102.5.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Where materials are encountered which are deemed as unsuitable by the Engineer for
use in the work, they shall be removed to a minimum depth of 19 inches or to the depth and
limit as ordered by the Engineer, whichever is greater. Areas undergraded shall be backfilled
with one of the following materials as determined by the Engineer:
1. Replacement with suitable materials from excavation on the work site or from an off-site
borrow area, compacted to the required moisture and density requirements where
practicable.
2. Mixing of stone base or rock materials, hydrated lime, portland cement or fly ash into the
sub-grade
3. Placement of compacted aggregate.
4. Rock fragments or spalls. A granular type material having a plasticity index not to exceed
10 and a gradation such that at least 50 percent of the material will be retained on the
No. 4 Sieve and not more than 40 percent will pass the No. 10 Sieve.
U. Section 2102.6.B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“B. Starting the Embankment
Where embankments, regardless of height, are placed against hillsides or existing
embankments, either of which have a slope steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal, the existing
slope shall be benched or stepped in approximately 24 inch rises as the new fill is brought
up in 8 inch maximum layers or lifts. The material bladed out, the bottom of the area cut into,
and the embankment material being placed, shall be compacted to the required density.
Material cut out, bladed into place and compacted shall not be measured and paid for directly
but will be considered as incidental work.
The existing surface upon which embankment material is to be placed shall have all unstable
and unsuitable material removed before starting the embankment work. Where
embankments 2 feet or less in depth are to be placed on areas covered by existing pavement,
the existing pavement shall be removed and the cleared ground surface shall be compacted
to the specified density with the required moisture. Where embankments greater than 2 feet
in depth are to be placed on areas covered by existing pavement, the existing pavement shall

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 6


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

be broken into pieces no larger than 12 inches maximum dimension, left in place and the
embankment started thereon. The existing pavement shall be free of all foreign material such
as rebar, wire mesh and pavement fabric.”
V. Section 2102.6.C: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“C. Placing Earth Embankment
Earth shall be placed in successive horizontal layers distributed uniformly over the full width
of the embankment area. Each layer of material shall not exceed 8 inches maximum in
thickness (loose state) and shall be compacted to not less than the required density before
the next layer is placed thereon. As the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous
blading, or dozing will be required to level the surface and to ensure uniform compaction.
Embankment construction shall not be performed when material contains frost, is frozen or
is snow covered.
1. Within the ROW: In no case shall rocks, larger than three (3) inches in any dimension, be
deposited within the Right-of-Way. As an exception, embankments that exceed five (5) feet
in depth, may include rock greater than three (3) inches but less than twelve (12) inches in
diameter, at the discretion of the Engineer.
2. Outside the ROW: In no case shall rocks, larger than three (3) inches in any dimension,
be deposited within the top twelve (12) inches of an embankment. In no case shall rocks,
larger than twelve (12) inches in any dimension, be placed throughout the remaining depth
of the embankment.”
W. Section 2102.6.E: This section shall be deleted.
X. Section 2102.6.F: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“F. Compacting the Embankment
Before placing any embankment, the surface of the existing ground shall be prepared as
specified herein, moistened as required, and the top 6 inches compacted to a density of 90
percent as prescribed by the following paragraph:
All embankment shall be compacted to a density of at least 90 percent of the maximum
density for the material used as determined by ASTM D 698 with a moisture range sufficient
to allow for proper compaction. In addition to the above required compaction, the subgrade
between lines 1 foot outside of the curbs and within the top 6 inches of the subgrade in cut
sections and the top 18 inches in fill sections shall be compacted to a density of at least 95
percent of the maximum density for material used as determined by ASTM D 698 and with a
tolerance of ± 3% of the optimum moisture at maximum density. The subgrade between lines
1 foot outside of the curbs and within the top 6 inches of the subgrade in cut sections shall
also be plowed, scarified, or broken up before compacting.
All work involved in either adding moisture to or removing moisture from embankment
materials to within these moisture limits shall be considered incidental to the completion of
the grading operation.”
Y. Section 2102.7: The following shall be added to this section:
“D. Fine Grading:
Except where other permit or utility work is in progress, the graded surface shall be free of
rock, concrete, brick, rubbish and other types of unsuitable material. The graded surface shall
be finished to within one-tenth (0.1) foot of the elevations, slopes, contours, and cross-
sections shown within the Construction Documents, including shoulder, berm, and sidewalk
spaces.

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 7


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of
slopes, provided the result is uniform and conforming to the lines and grades shown within
the Construction Documents.”
Z. Section 2103.2.A: The following item shall be added to this section:
“6. Clearing, grubbing, and demolition shall be plan measured. Tree removal shall be field
measured.”
AA. Section 2103.2.B: The following shall be added to this section:
“6. Unclassified excavation, earth excavation, and embankment shall be plan measured.
Rock excavation and undergrading shall be field measured.”
BB. Section 2103.3.B.3: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“3. Undergrading may be listed in the Contact Documents and will be paid for at the Contract
unit bid price. Backfill of undergraded areas shall be subsidiary to this pay item.”

END OF SECTION

Division 4100 Sitework 4110 - 8


Section 4110 Grading and Site Preparation 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4100 SITEWORK

SECTION 4120 – SEEDING AND SODDING

1.01 GENERAL
This section covers the preparation of the seed bed and the furnishing and planting of seed. For
public improvement projects seeding shall be required at all locations shown within the
Construction Documents and for all grass covered areas that are disturbed by construction
operations, either by grading, parking of equipment, temporary roads, or any other operation that
has destroyed the existing grasses of the original site. Additionally, seed shall not be used in any
area designated within the Construction Documents to be replaced with sod or areas where
established turf was damaged during construction activities.
A. Specifications to be Used: All preparation of the seed bed and the furnishing and
planting of seed shall be performed in accordance with Division II – Construction and
Material Specifications, Section 2400 – Seeding and Sodding published by the Kansas City
Metropolitan Chapter of the American Public Works Association except as amended below.

1.02 REFERENCE
The following standards are directly referenced in this section. The latest version of these
standards shall be used.
A. APWA, Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter (KC-APWA):
1. Section 2400 – “Seeding and Sodding”

1.03 AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS


The following amendments and modifications shall apply to Seeding and Sodding.
A. Section 2400.6.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Acceptance
Acceptance by the Owner will occur when areas seeded and/or sodded are determined to be
established turf areas ready for mowing. Grass areas in excess of six (6) inches by six (6)
inches that are dead or in poor condition regarding color and quality shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense prior to the initiation of the Maintenance Period.”
B. Section 2400.6.E: This section shall be added:
“E. Warranty
The Contractor is responsible for warranting the stand of grass for a period of one full growing
season (spring to fall) after Substantial Completion. The warranty shall cover against defects
including but not limited to death and unsatisfactory growth. The warranty does not include
defects resulting from abuse or damage by others.”
C. Section 2401.2.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“Seed: Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and
Regulations under Federal Seed Act. Seed shall be free from noxious weeds and recleaned
“Grade A” recent crop seed treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. Seed which
has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable.

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 1


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Seed mix to be used will be identified prior to sowing. Seed shall comply with the
requirements of the applicable Kansas State Seed Laws.
1. Mixture: The seed mixture shall be as follows:
(a) Thirty percent (30%) each of any three (3) varieties of turf type tall fescue (K-31 is not
allows)
(b) Ten Percent (10%) perennial rye

Seed Type Minimum Pure Rate of Pure Live


Live Seed (%) Seed (lbs./acre)
Fescue 83 348
Perennial Rye 80 90
2. Label: Seeds shall be delivered to the site in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged,
containers. Each container shall be fully labeled, bearing the name, trade name, or trade
mark, and a warranty of the producer and a certificate of the percentage of the purity and
germination of each kind of seed in accordance with the requirements of the Kansas
Crop Improvement Association and the Kansas Seed Law
3. Agricultural Land: The Contractor is responsible for identifying existing pasture grasses
prior to the start of construction, and shall seed those areas to match the existing
species.”
D. Section 2401.2.C: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“C. Water
Water shall be suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Under no
circumstances shall the Contractor use water from adjacent fire hydrants or public water lines
unless metered. Water, hose and other watering equipment required for the work shall be
furnished by the Contractor.”
E. Section 2401.2.G: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“G. Top Soil
The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to stockpile existing top soil prior to
excavation and reuse it in the same general locations. No payment will be made for topsoil
furnishing and placement necessary due to excessive hauling off of existing top soil on the
project site.
Topsoil shall be friable, loamy soil with a good supply of humus and high degree of fertility,
black or dark brown in color, subject to the approval of the Engineer based on visual and
tactile inspection. Topsoil may be either naturally occurring field topsoil or blended from a
mineral subsoil and organic compost.
Prior to placing top soil on residential or commercial private property, the Contractor shall
facilitate a meeting with the Property Owner, Owner, Engineer, and Contractor to review the
grading. Topsoil shall not be placed while in a frozen or muddy condition.”
F. Section 2401.2.M: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“M. Planting Dates
Seeding and fertilizing shall be performed between August 15 and October 1 for fall planting
and between February 15 and May 1 for spring planting. If the Contractor elects to seed

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 2


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

outside of the designated seeding season, the Contractor shall provide a letter to the City
Engineer assuming all risk of seed placement and establishment.”
G. Section 2401.2.N: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“N. Pre-planting Inspection
Prior to the work of this section, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may
properly commence. The Contractor shall also verify that rough grading is complete and has
been reviewed by the City prior to starting seeding activities.”
H. Section 2401.3.B: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“B. All areas to be seeded shall be tilled or disked to a depth of 3-4 inches and raked or
smoothed to remove debris, clods, surface stone, 1-inch diameter objects or larger, roots,
wire, grade stakes, and other objects that might be a hindrance to maintenance. Grades on
the areas to be sodded or seeded shall be maintained in true, even and compacted conditions
to prevent the formations of depressions. Areas overseeded, to be seeded that have washed
or eroded shall be brought to grade and compacted thoroughly by the Contractor prior to
placing the seeding or overseeding. No grading shall be done when the soils are in a muddy
or frozen condition. Seed shall not be drilled or sown during windy weather or when the
ground is frozen or otherwise untillable”
I. Section 2401.3.H: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“H. Sowing shall be accomplished by use of an approved mechanical seeder or drill (hand
spreader can be used in small areas), making sure that successive seed strips overlap to
provide uniform coverage. Seed should be drilled to a depth of 1/2 inch.
1. Seed mixed in proportions shown in Section 2405.2 may be broadcast by approved
sowing equipment. The seed shall be uniformly distributed over the designated areas.
The seed shall be covered to an average depth of ½ inch by means of a brush harrow,
spike-tooth harrow, chain American Public Works Association 7 February 2017 Kansas
City Metropolitan Chapter harrow, cultipacker or other approved device. The seed drill
shall be set to space the rows not more than four (4) inches apart. The Contractor shall
make two passes, one in each direction with the seed drill. Seed shall not be drilled or
sown during windy weather or when the ground is frozen or otherwise untillable.
2. Areas to be seeded shall be fertilized at rates specified in Section 2401.3.F. The seedbed
shall be free of any irregularities in the surface, and shall be corrected in order to prevent
formation of water pockets. All seeded areas are to be completely covered with
hydromulch or with straw anchored to the soil a minimum depth of 3 inches by a disc
harrow set nearly straight, to properly maintain soil moisture and to provide shade for the
newly germinated chutes.
3. Promptly after mulching, wet the seedbed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout
the germination period. Protect all turf areas by erecting temporary fences, barriers,
signs, etc. as necessary to prevent trampling and disturbance.
4. When delays in operations carry the work beyond the most favorable planting season
for the grasses designated, or when conditions are such, by reason of drought, high
winds, excessive moisture, or other factors that satisfactory results are not likely to be
obtained, the seeding operation shall be stopped and work shall be resumed only when
conditions are favorable again or when approved alternative or corrective measures and
procedures have been put into effect. If inspection during seeding operations or after
indicate there are areas which have been skipped, the sowing of additional seed on
these areas will be required.
Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 3
Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

5. The seeded areas will be inspected for acceptable grass coverage and will be acceptable
when grasses designated are growing and are in good condition and no area more than
½ of one percent of the total areas shall be bare, of which no single area shall be more
than one foot square in area. Any bare area larger than this will not be acceptable and
shall be reseeded.”
J. Section 2402.2: The following shall be added to this section:
“L. Water:
Water shall be suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Under no
circumstances shall the Contractor use water from adjacent fire hydrants or public water lines
unless metered. Water, hose and other watering equipment required for the work shall be
furnished by the Contractor.”
K. Section 2402.2.A: The section shall be deleted and replaced by the following:
“A. Sod:
Sod shall be turf type tall fescue (K-31 is not allowed) or as indicated within the Construction
Documents. Sod placement for repair of an existing lawn shall match the species of the
existing lawn. The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately determining the existing
species. If the existing species cannot be properly identified, then the Contractor shall use
turf type tall fescue.
Sod shall comply with the quality of Nursery Grown Sod as defined by the American Sod
Producers Association and shall meet the following requirements:
1. Thickness: Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of one (1) inch, plus or
minus one quarter (1/4) inch, at the time of cutting. Measurement for thickness shall
exclude top growth and thatch.
2. Size: Sod shall be cut in strips not less than eighteen (18) inches wide and not less than
three (3) feet long.
3. Moisture: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content (excessively
dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival.
4. Mowing: Before harvesting, sod shall be mowed uniformly to a height of one (1) to one
and one half (1 1/2) inches.
5. Appearance: At the time of initial acceptance, sod shall be densely rooted, dark green in
color, and not containing more than ten percent (10%) by coverage of other grasses or
clovers.
6. Weeds and Insects: Sod shall be free of noxious weeds and foreign grass. Sod shall be
free of soil-born insects.”
L. Section 2402.2.C: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“C. Top Soil:
The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to stockpile existing top soil prior to
excavation and reuse it in the same general locations. No payment will be made for topsoil
furnishing and placement necessary due to excessive hauling off of existing top soil on the
project site.
Topsoil shall be friable, loamy soil with a good supply of humus and high degree of fertility,
black or dark brown in color, subject to the approval of the Engineer based on visual and
tactile inspection. Topsoil may be either naturally occurring field topsoil or blended from a
mineral subsoil and organic compost.

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 4


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Prior to placing top soil on residential or commercial private property, the Contractor shall
facilitate a meeting with the Property Owner, Owner, Engineer, and Contractor to review the
grading. Topsoil shall not be placed while in a frozen or muddy condition.”
M. Section 2402.2.I: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“I. Planting Dates:
Sodding shall be performed between March 1 and May 1 for the spring season and between
September 1 and November 15 for the fall season, unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer.
1. If the soil is not frozen and workable, the Engineer may allow placement of sod between
November 15 and March 1. If sod is placed during this time, the Contractor shall maintain the
sod until established.
2. If the Contractor elects to place sod outside of the designated sodding season, they shall
provide a letter to the City Engineer assuming all risk of sod placement and establishment.”
N. Section 2402.2.J: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“J. Pre-planting Inspection:
Prior to the work of this section, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may
properly commence. The Contractor shall also verify that rough grading is complete and has
been reviewed by the City prior to starting seeding activities.”
O. Section 2402.3.B: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“B. Areas to be sodded shall be fertilized at the rates specified in Section 2401.3.F. The sod-
bed shall be free of any irregularities in the surface resulting from fertilizing or other
operations and shall be corrected in order to prevent the formation of water pockets. Freshly
graded areas, which have set long enough to become dry and crusted over, shall be tilled as
specified above, prior to placing the sod. Grade of the area shall be approximately one (1)
inch below desired final grade to allow for the thickness of the sod. If the area has been
severely compacted by heavy trucks or other equipment, it shall be cultivated to a depth of
six (6) to eight (8) inches by tilling or disking. Fill areas shall be compacted to a sufficient
density to prevent excessive settling after placement of sod. If footprints left by an adult
walking across the area are more than one half (1/2) inch deep, the compaction is not
sufficient.”
P. Section 2402.3.C: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“C. The first row of sod should, if possible, be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows
placed parallel and tightly against one another. Lateral joints shall be staggered as in brick
laying to promote more uniform growth and strength. Care shall be exercised to ensure that
the sod in not stretched or overlapped and that all joints are butted tight in order to prevent
voids which would otherwise cause air drying of the roots. Where new sod meets existing
grassed areas, a straight, vertical edge shall be cut to allow smooth match. Where the width
of the disturbed area is less than the width of machine cut sod strips being laid, enough
existing turf shall be removed to neat lines to create a uniform area not less than six (6)
inches in width. Sod shall be watered and firmed in accordance with Section 2400.6.B. If it is
necessary to walk excessively on newly laid sod or soil, walking boards should be laid for this
purpose.”
Q. Section 2402.3.I: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 5


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

“I. Maintenance of sodded areas shall include watering, weeding, mowing to a 2½ inch height
after growth has exceeded 3 inches and prior to a 4 inch growth, replacement and installation
of sod as originally specified for sodded areas failing to survive, and repair of rutting, should
that occur. Clippings from mowing which mat on the grass are to be removed.
Any damage caused by watering activities shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor.
Typical items in need of repair after warning include but are not limited to damage to sod and
erosion of topsoil. Eroded topsoil shall be immediately cleaned from all curb, driveways,
sidewalks, etc. Watering by flooding or high-pressure hoses is prohibited.”
R. Section 2401.1: The following paragraph shall be added to this section:
“Hydroseeding shall be allowed only with the approval of the Engineer or if specified in the
construction documents.”
S. Section 2404.2: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“Areas to be hydroseeded shall be fertilized at rates specified in Section 2401.3.F of Division
II – Construction and Material Specifications, Section 2400 – Seeding and Sodding published
by the Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter of the American Public Works Association. The
seed-bed shall be free of any irregularities in the surface, and shall be corrected to prevent
formation of water pockets.
1. The bonded fiber matrix shall be manufactured to be hydraulically applied, and upon
drying, adhere to the soil in the form of a continuous, one hundred percent (100%)
coverage, biodegradable, erosion control blanket.
2. The bonded fiber matrix shall be comprised of long strand, wood fibers, produced from
thermo-mechanical methods. The fibers shall be joined together by a high-strength non-
toxic adhesive to create a continuous three-dimensional blanket that adheres to the soil
surface when hydraulically applied.
3. The product shall be composed of ninety percent (90%) wood fiber and ten percent
(10%) blended hydrocolloid-based binder, all by total weight.
4. The formed matrix shall meet the following requirements:
(a) When dry, it shall not dissolve or disperse upon rewetting.
(b) Shall have minimum water holding capacity of ten (10) times its dry weight.
(c) Shall not form a crust that inhibits water infiltration.
(d) Shall not inhibit the germination or growth of plants.
(e) Shall be one hundred percent (100%) biodegradable and non-toxic to fish and wildlife.
(f) Shall be a minimum of one-eighth (1/8) inch thick over the entire surface.
(g) Shall have no holes greater than one (1) inch in size.
5. The bonded fiber matrix shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6. Bonded fiber matrix shall be applied at a minimum rate of three thousand (3,000) pounds
per acre dry weight of bonded fiber matrix. Additional material will be applied at the
direction of the Engineer.
7. The Contractor shall utilize standard hydraulic seeding equipment in successive layers
to achieve one hundred percent (100%) coverage of all exposed soil. Successive layers
shall be applied in alternating directions.

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 6


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

8. The bonded fiber matrix shall not be applied immediately before, during or after rainfall,
such that the matrix will have opportunity to dry for up to twenty-four (24) hours after
installation.”
T. Section 2404.3.C: This section shall be deleted.
U. Section 2406.2.A.1: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“1. Seeding will be plan-measured per acre or hundredth part thereof. No measurement will
be made in areas that are not grassed, such as street paving, driveways, parking areas,
gardens, and sidewalks. Areas that are disturbed which lie outside the Contractor’s seeding
limits, as defined by the Plans or Contract Documents, will not be measured for payment, but
shall be restored to a condition equal to or better than that existing prior to construction.”
V. Section 2406.2.B.1: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“1. Sodding will be field measured per square yard or tenth part thereof. Sodding will be
measured complete, in-place, to the nearest acre. No measurement will be made in areas
that are not grassed, such as street paving, driveways, parking areas, gardens, and
sidewalks. Areas that are disturbed which lie outside the Contractor’s seeding limits, as
defined by the Plans or Contract Documents, will not be measured for payment, but shall be
restored to a condition equal to or better than that existing prior to construction.”
W. Section 2406.3: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“Payment for seeding and sodding will be paid for at the Contract Unit Prices as listed in the
Unit Prices Bid Form. Such payment and price shall constitute full compensation for all labor,
materials, tools and equipment necessary to complete the item.
Soil preparation, scalping of existing vegetation, top soil, fertilizer, mulch, watering, seed,
compaction, maintenance, protection and repair, clean-up, cultivating, warranty work, and
other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit price of seed and sod.”

END OF SECTION

Division 4100 Sitework 4120 - 7


Section 4120 Seeding and Sodding Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4205 – ASPHALT PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section includes the application of prime and/or tack coats and the construction of asphalt
concrete base and/or asphalt concrete surface.

1.02 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. ASTM:
1. C 88/C 88M – Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
2. C 117 – Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
3. C 127 – Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption
of Coarse Aggregate
4. C 128 – Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption
of Fine Aggregate
5. C 131/C 131M - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
6. C 136/C 136M – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
7. C 142/C 142M – Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates
8. D 75/D 75M – Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
9. D 140/D 140M – Standard Practice for Sampling Asphalt Materials
10. D 979/D 979M – Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
11. D 1188 – Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted
Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples
12. D 2041/D 2041M – Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Asphalt Mixtures
13. D 2172/D 2172M – Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt
Binder from Asphalt Mixtures
14. D 2726/D 2726M – Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-
Absorptive Compacted Asphalt Mixtures
15. D 2950/D 2950M – Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place
by Nuclear Methods

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 1


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

16. D 3381/D 3381M – Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Binder for Use
in Pavement Construction
17. D 3666 – Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and
Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
18. D 4552/D 4552M – Standard Practice for Classifying Hot-Mix Recycling Agents
19. D 5444 – Standard Test Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate
20. D 6307 – Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Asphalt Mixture by Ignition
Method
21. D 6373 – Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder
B. AASHTO:
1. T 245 – Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Asphalt Mixtures
Using Marshall Apparatus
2. T 283 – Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures to
Moisture-Induced Damage
C. Asphalt Institute:
“Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types”, MS-2, Sixth Edition
D. National Institute of Standards & Technology:
Handbook #44, “Specifications, Tolerance and other Technical Requirements for Weighing
and Measuring Devices, 2020”
E. APWA:
Construction and Material Specifications, Section 2200 Paving, Kansas City Metropolitan
Chapter
F. KDOT:
1. Standard Specifications for State Road and Bridge Construction, 2015 Edition,
Sections 603
2. Kansas Test Method K-46 from the KDOT Construction Manual, Latest Revision

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Approval of Materials: Asphalt materials shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use in
the work. The Engineer may accept a certified analysis by the material supplier laboratory
when a copy of the certified analysis accompanies each shipment of asphalt to the project.
The Engineer reserves the right to perform tests of the asphalt received on the job.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
No material shall be used until it has been approved by the Engineer. All costs associated with
material testing, certification and the preparation of trial mixes to determine the job mix formula
shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Representative samples of all materials proposed
for use under these specifications shall be submitted to the testing laboratory by the Contractor,
at the Contractor's expense, for testing and the preparation of trial mixes to determine the job-
mix formula. Additional tests necessary for determining conformance with the requirements

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 2


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

specified herein will be performed under the supervision of the Engineer without cost to the
Contractor, unless testing is the responsibility of the contractor in the contract.
A. Asphalt: Asphalt cement used in the manufacture of asphalt paving mixtures shall conform
to the latest ASTM specifications for “Asphalt Cements and Liquid Asphalts”. The PG
graded material used shall conform to the provincial grade used by the local DOT or as
designated by the Engineer. In the Kansas City Metropolitan area, the provincial grade is a
PG64-22.
1. These general usage guidelines may not address all project conditions. APWA strongly
recommends that the engineer apply sound pavement design principles when
designating mix type and selecting asphalt cement grade based upon individual project
conditions. The Federal Highway Administration makes available LTPPBIND software
that will assist with asphalt grade selection for specific projects.
2. The asphalt cements used shall conform to ASTM D 946, ASTM D 3381, or ASTM D
6373. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D 140.
3. The Contractor shall submit a temperature-viscosity chart showing the recommended
mix and compaction temperatures, and shall provide the specific gravity of the asphalt
cements used.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 3


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

B. Liquid Asphalt Material: The liquid asphalt material to be used for surface preparation
shall be as listed in the following table:
Emulsion Application Application Cure Time
Material to Application or Grade of Rate Temp. at 70° F
be Treated Usage Cutback (Gal/SY) (°F) (hours)
Tack RC-70 0.05-0.10 150-225 1-6
Existing
Asphalt or SS-1
Concrete SS-1h
Tack 0.05-0.15 70-160 1-3
Surface CSS-1
CSS-1h
MC-30
Treated Prime 0.10-0.30 85-120 12-24
MC-70
Base
SS-1
(i.e. lime, fly
SS-1h
ash, Prime 0.10-0.30 70-160 24-48
CSS-1
cement)
CSS-1h
Untreated
Aggregate MC-30
Prime 0.10-0.30 85-120 12-24
Base w/ MC-70
Fines
Untreated
Aggregate
Prime MC-250 0.20-0.50 85-120 12-24
Base w/o
Fines
SS-1
SS-1h
Prime 0.10-0.30 70-160 24-48
Untreated CSS-1
Aggregate CSS-1h
Base EAP
Prime PAE 0.10-0.30 70-160 12-24
PEP
The asphalt material shall conform to the latest ASTM specifications for “Asphalt Cements
and Liquid Asphalts.” Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D 140.
C. Sand Cover: Sand Cover, if used, shall be any clean granular mineral meeting the
following grading requirements. When tested with laboratory sieves 100% shall pass the
No. 4 sieve and not more than 2% shall pass the No. 200 sieve. The moisture content of
the sand shall not exceed 3% by weight.
D. Aggregate: The quality of aggregates used in Asphaltic Concrete shall conform to the
following:
1. Coarse Aggregate (Retained on the No. 4 Sieve)
(a) LA Abrasion (ASTM C 131) 40% loss (max)
(b) Sounds using Mag. Sulfate (ASTM C 88, 5 cycles) 18% loss (max)
(c) Total shale, clay, cola, and lignite content ASTM C 142 1% by weight (max)
2. Fine Aggregate (Passing the No. 4 Sieve)
(a) Organic Content 1% (maximum)

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 4


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

(b) The parent material of manufactured sand must also meet the requirements for
coarse aggregate shown above.
Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D 75. Gradation analysis shall be in
accordance with Standard Method of Test for Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing, ASTM C 117 and Standard Method Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine
and Coarse Aggregate, ASTM C 136.

2.02 MIXING AND PROPORTIONING


A. Composition of the Mix: Asphaltic concrete mixtures shall consist of Mineral Aggregates
and Asphalt Cement within the following limits for the type specified.
Asphaltic Concrete Type
1-01 2-01 3-01 4-01 5-01 6-01
Percent by Weight of AC-
20 (Base Courses) or PG
4-6 4-7 4-7 5-7.5 * *
64-22 (Surface course
Asphalt Cement

Standard Square
Total Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Size
1 1/2” 100 -- -- -- -- --
1” 75-100 100 -- -- 100 --
3/4” 60-85 80-100 100 -- 95-100 100
1/2" -- -- 85-100 100 -- 86-100
3/8” 40-65 60-80 70-90 85-100 -- 75-100
No. 4 30-50 48-65 50-70 55-75 -- --
No. 8 19-36 35-47 37-47 39-50 28 min 28 min
No. 16 13-26 25-36 26-36 27-38 -- --
No. 30 -- 18-30 18-30 19-30 -- --
No. 50 -- 12-22 12-22 11-23 -- --
No. 100 4-12 6-14 6-15 6-16 -- --
No. 200 2-10 3-10 4-10 4-10 2-6 2-6
* The contractor or the contractors testing laboratory shall determine the percent of PG64-
22 Asphalt Cement used for the specific job mix of surface course.
In addition to the above limits, the difference between the "Percent Passing Square Mesh
Sieve" of successive sieve sizes shall not exceed 25 for types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-01.
That fraction of material retained on the No. 4 Sieve-shall be composed of particles with not
less than 75% having two or more fractured faces for asphalt types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-
01, and not more than 20% by weight of that fraction shall be composed of flat or elongated
particles as described in Section 2202.2 of APWA Construction and Materials
Specifications. For Asphalt Types 5-01 and 6-01 only, the total aggregate (coarse
aggregate, fine aggregate, and the material passing the No. 200 sieve shall contain not less
than 85% crushed material for intermediate course and surface course.
It shall be noted that when the gradation varies appreciably from the single point gradation
used in the mix-design, the test properties of the mix will be out of specifications. This
condition can occur even though the gradation meets the tolerances below.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 5


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

The job-mix formula shall be within the limits specified above. The maximum permissible
variation from the job-mix formula, within the specification limits, shall be as followed:

Permissible Gradation Variation from Mix Design Percent by Weight of Total Mix

U.S. Standard Sieve Size Type 1-01, 5-01, & 6-01 Type 2-01, 3-01, & 4-01
No. 4 and larger 5.0 4.0
No. 8, 16, 30, and 50 4.0 3.0
No. 200 2.0 1.0
Asphalt Cement 0.1 (1-01 mix only) 0.3

B. Asphalt Mix General Usage:

Street Classification Surface Base

Arterial 6-01 2-01, 5-01

Collector 6-01 2-01, 5-01


Local/Access 6-01 2-01, 5-01

Unless otherwise noted, 2-01 shall be used for all base courses. Other mixes may be
designated for surface and/or base, in lieu of what is shown in the table. Generally, mix
types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-01 are composed of local materials and are appropriate for
general use. Mix types 5-01 and 6-01 are engineered to have better mix properties to
increase durability and life of the pavement, and as such are best used on high-type
pavements.
C. Asphalt Hot-Mix Recycling:
1. General: Except as modified herein, Recycled Asphaltic Concrete (RAC) shall be equal
to that type specified produced as new material. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)
and/or Reclaimed Aggregate Materials (RAM) shall represent no more than 30% of the
composition for all surface mixtures and no more than 40% of the composition for all
base mixtures except type 5-01 and 6-01 (no more than 30%) provided the mix design
will still meet the gradation requirements of the type specified. Recycled or virgin
materials may be used on all projects. Recycled Asphaltic Concrete may contain
combinations of RAP, RAM, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, asphalt
cement, recycling agent, anti-stripping agent and approved additives to produce an
acceptable mixture. Recycled Asphaltic Concretes shall be designated by prefacing the
type with “RC,” such as “RC-Type 1-01”

2. Materials Evaluation: All recycled materials shall have the following additional tests:
(a) A sieve analysis shall be performed on RAP and/or RAM in accordance with
ASTM C 117, "Standard Test Method for Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing" and ASTM C 136, "Standard Method for Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" after extraction of asphalt.
(b) Asphalt content analysis shall be performed for RAP in accordance with Method
"A" of ASTM D 2172 , "Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 6


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures" where the RAP content exceeds
30%. For mixtures with RAP contents less than 30%, asphalt content may be
determined using ASTM D6307.
(c) The asphalt cement used shall be determined as follows:
(i) For RAP contents of up to 20%, the asphalt grade shall be as specified in
the mix design.
(ii) For RAP contents from 20% up to 30%, the asphalt grade shall be
decreased one temperature range. For example, a design PG 64-22
would be decreased to a PG 58-22 with a viscosity in the range of 800 to
1200 poises.
(iii) For RAP contents from 30% to 50%, the asphalt grade of the new asphalt
shall be determined using the procedures outlined in MS-2, 6th Edition,
Appendix A.
(d) All sources of material for use in RAC must be approved by the Engineer prior to
use.
3. Material Requirements:
(a) New asphalt cements added to the aged asphalt shall meet the
requirements of Section 2205.2A of APWA Construction and Material
Specifications.
(b) Recycling Agents, if used, shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 4552,
"Standard Practice for Classifying HOT MIX Recycling Agents."
(c) The RAP and/or RAM stockpiled at the plant site shall be maintained in
stockpiles separated into surface and base. The RAP and/or RAM shall be
processed such that 100% will pass the 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sieve and 90% will
pass the 1-inch sieve.
(d) The final product shall be free of foreign matter (e.g., old planer teeth, ice, wood,
soil, broken sewer castings, loop detector wire, protective membranes,
rubberized joint filler materials and foil turn lane markers, trash, debris, etc.)
4. Mix Design Requirements: The necessary steps for a final mix design for recycled
mixtures, shall be done in accordance with the Asphalt Institute's Manual MS-2 Sixth
Edition in the appendix entitled "Mix Design Using RAP
When a change in the RAP and/or RAM percentage exceeds 15% of the original
amount of RAP and/or RAM in the mix design, a new mix design must be submitted.
5. Asphalt Plant Requirements: All delivery tickets shall designate the type of recycled
mix, (RC-Type 1-01, RC-Type 2-01, RC-Type 3-01, or RC-Type 401).
D. Mix Design Criteria: Laboratory Test Specimen(s) of the Paving Mix, combined in
proportions of the job-mix formula, shall be prepared and tested in accordance with
AASHTO T 245 and the volumetric properties of the compacted paving mixtures as
calculated by ASTM procedures using Chapter 4 of the Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and other Hot-Mix types (MS-2), Sixth Edition, Asphalt Institute referred hereafter
as “MS-2”. The Marshall procedure and the Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) shall be
as specified in Chapter 5 of the MS-2. The automatic Marshall Hammer may be used when
it has been calibrated with a manual hammer.
Optionally, for mix type 5-01 and/or 6-01 a SuperGyratory Compactor (SGC)may be used to
prepare the asphalt samples for design and quality control testing. The gyratory values to
Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 7
Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

be used for this purpose are Ninitial = 6, Ndesign = 50, and Nmax = 75. If this option is selected,
Marshall stability and flow measurements will be waived during design and production. At
Ninitial ,the specific gravity of the specimen must be 90.5% or less of Gmm, at Nmax the specific
gravity of the specimen must be 98% or less of Gmm
The material for the theoretical specific gravity ASTM D 2041 and the material for the
Marshall specimens (pucks) shall be cured at 285+/-5ºF for two hours in a closed oven after
the mix is produced in the laboratory. Also, the plant-produced mixture shall be tested when
the mix is two hours old. The mixture shall be transported to the laboratory in an insulated
container and then stored in a laboratory oven at 140 +/-3°C for the remainder of the curing
period. This procedure shall be used when the water-absorption as determined by ASTM C
127 and ASTM C 128 of any aggregate in the mixture exceeds 1.25%. The mixture shall be
compacted at 140 +/-3°C.
Test requirements and criteria for the paving mixes under these specifications shall be as
follows:
1. Marshall Stability: 1500 lbs. (Types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-01), 1800 lbs (Types 5-01
& 6-01)
2. No. of Compaction Blows: 50 (for Types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-01), 75 (for Types 5-
01 & 6-01)
3. Flow: 0.08” – 0.16” max (Types 1-01 – 4-01), 0.14” inches max (Types 5-01 & 6-01)
4. Air Voids (Laboratory Specimen):
(a) Base 3-5%
(b) Surface 3-5%
5. Voids filled with asphalt; percent (VFA) Types 5-01 & 6-01: 65-75 Percent
6. Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

Nominal Max Size as Defined in MS-2 Percent (min)


1 1/2" 11

1” 12
3/4" 13

1/2" 14

3/8” 15
The VMA properties for mixes 1-01,2-01,3-01, & 4-01 shall be measured in accordance with
the procedure described herein and reported on the material data forms; however, there is
no minimum criteria controlling VMA associated with these material gradations.
The VMA for Mix Types 5-01 & 6-01 shall be the minimum value allowed. For these mixes,
the asphalt content should be just to the left side of the low point on the VMA vs. Asphalt
Percent curve, not to the “wet” or right (increasing) side of the curve.
The VMA requirements shown represent values that may be higher than those obtained in
the KC Metropolitan area using locally available materials. The minimum values are values
recommended by the Asphalt Institute in MS-2 6th Edition for high quality asphaltic
concretes, but may require the use of non-local aggregates. VMA values shown are for 4%
air voids and should be used for the design of conventional roadway pavements. During

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 8


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

production, the voids can be expected to vary plus or minus 1% of this design value of 4%.
Under these conditions, the minimum allowable VMA values should be calculated by
interpolation of the chart in MS-2, 6th Edition. For mix types 1-01, 2-01, 3-01, and 4-01, 3%
air voids may be used for design. and production may be allowed to vary plus or minus 1%
of the design value.
The ratio of minus 200 material to % Effective asphalt cement (Peff) based on the weight of
the aggregate shall be between 0.6-1.2 for Types 5-01 and 6-01.
The blend of RAP and/or RAM and virgin aggregates or non-recycled asphalts shall be
checked for resistance to stripping using AASHTO T 283 to determine if an anti-stripping
agent is needed for the same asphalt chosen for the project. The index of retained strength
shall exceed 75% for Types 1-01 – 4-01, and 80% for types 5-01 and 6-01.
E. Sampling and Testing of the Mixture: Mixes shall be sampled in accordance with ASTM
D 979 and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245. The mixtures will be tested for binder
content in accordance with ASTM D 2172 or D 6307. The recovered aggregate will be
sieved in accordance with ASTM D 5444.
F. Mixture Temperature Requirements: The temperature of the completed mix at the plant
and at the paver shall be set by the Contractor who shall consider hauling and placing
conditions, asphalt specifications as set forth in section 2205.2, and weather limitations set
forth in section 2205.8 (B) of APWA Construction and Material Specifications. The
temperature of Types 5-01 and 6-01 shall not exceed 315° F at the point of discharge from
the asphalt plant when using PG 64-22 asphaltic oil.
When the mix is produced in a batch-type plant, the aggregate shall be weighed accurately
in the designated proportions to provide the specified batch weight. The temperature of the
aggregate at the time of introduction into the mixer shall be determined by the contractor,
with a tolerance of + or - 25º F. In no case, however, shall the temperature of the mixture
exceed the maximum temperature recommended by the manufacturer or supplier of the
asphaltic cement (generally 350º F).
G. Control of Mixing Time: The contractor shall control mixing time to produce asphaltic
concrete that is uniformly and thoroughly coated with asphaltic cement.
H. Preparation of Asphalt Cement: The asphalt shall be heated so that it can be distributed
uniformly throughout the mix. For mixing applications, the specified temperature generally
will be such that the asphalt viscosity is within the range of 150-190 centistokes and shall
not exceed 350º F. The material shall be sufficiently fluid to produce a complete coating on
every particle of aggregate within the specified mixing time.
The contractor shall maintain calibrated temperature monitoring equipment at the point of
discharge from the asphalt plant and at the asphalt tank, and shall supply temperature
records upon request.
I. Preparation and Handling of Aggregate: Coarse and fine aggregate shall be stored at the
plant in such a manner that the separate sizes will not become intermixed. Cold aggregates
shall be carefully fed to the plant in such proportions that surpluses and shortages in the
bins will not cause breaks in the continuous operation. When loading aggregate into
stockpiles, and into cars, barges, and trucks, the material shall be placed in such a manner
as to prevent segregation of aggregate sizes. Stockpiles shall be built in uniform layers not
exceeding 5 feet in depth.
1. Samples: Samples of coarse and fine aggregate shall be submitted to the Engineer for
testing upon request. The contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 9


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

handling of aggregates to insure that the cold-feed gradations fall within the mix design
limits. Cold-feed gradation tests shall be taken as requested by the Engineer.
2. Drying: The aggregate shall be thoroughly dried and heated to provide a paving mix
temperature within a tolerance of + or – 25º F, of that specified by the approved mix
design. The moisture content of the heated and dried aggregate shall not exceed 0.5%.
The quantity of material fed through the dryer shall in all cases, be held to an amount
which can be thoroughly dried and heated.
J. Inspection and Control of Asphalt Mixing Plant:
1. Tests: During production the plant shall have the following tests performed by an
approved laboratory: AC content, extracted gradation, Marshall density, stability, voids,
vma, vfa and max theoretical density. Laboratories shall be approved if they are:
(a) Accredited in accordance with ASTM D3666; and/or
(b) Approved for Superpave asphalt testing by the State Highway Department in the
state where the plant is located.
(c) The individual performing the test must carry a state certification for Superpave
testing.
(d) The laboratory must have an annual certification by an independent testing
agency of all testing equipment used for Superpave mix designs, and must also
have the Marshall hammer weight and height of drop certified by that same
agency.
2. Availability of test reports: The results of the latest current test report shall be furnished
to the Engineer upon request. All test reports shall be kept at the plant, and shall be
made available upon request. If the mix is found to be outside of tolerance, or outside
the specification limits as specified in Section 2205.3 of APWA Construction and
Material Specifications, correction shall be made. Test reports shall be furnished on the
following “Asphalt Concrete Test” form.
3. Frequency of testing: For mixes 1-01 through 4-01, the tests listed in paragraph 1 shall
be performed every 3000 tons of asphalt production except during initial startup, or
whenever the production asphalt fails one of the following conditions at which time they
will be tested every 1000 tons until four consecutive tests show compliance with the
specifications:
(a) Production void content measured at the plant discharge is 1% below laboratory
mix design void content, or more than 5% total void content.
(b) Extracted gradation of the production asphalt exceeds the permissible gradation
variation for the mix type being produced.
(c) Asphalt cement exceeds the content variation for the mix type being produced.
4. Frequency of testing: For mixes 5-01 and 6-01, the tests listed in paragraph 1 shall be
performed once per day of production, or every 1000 tons , whichever is less frequent
except during initial startup; or whenever the production fails one of the following
conditions at which time they will be tested every 500 tons, or twice per day of
production, whichever is less frequent until 4 consecutive tests show compliance with
the specifications:
(a) Production void content measured at the plant discharge is less than 3% or more
than 5% Extracted gradation of the production asphalt exceeds the permissible
gradation variation for the mix type being produced.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 10


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

(b) Production vma measured at the plant discharge is below the design minimum
vma.
(c) Production vfa measured at the plant discharge is outside the allowable range.
5. Redesign of Asphalt mixes: If four consecutive tests performed as described in
paragraph 3 or 4 above show noncompliance with the specifications as enumerated in
the subparagraphs of paragraph 3 or 4 above, production of that type of asphalt will
immediately cease, and may not be resumed until a new mix design is submitted and
approved, or the plant can demonstrate to the engineer an ability to meet
specifications. Resumption of asphalt production after a mix redesign or failure of four
consecutive tests to meet specifications will be treated as an initial startup for testing
purposes.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 11


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE TEST (Verified Mix Design)

Description:
APWA Type:
LAB I.D.: LOT
Sample Date: Belt Tons
Sample I.D.: Hot Mix Tons
Supplier:

Sieve Size Belt Sample Hot-Mix Single Point Job-Mix ASTM C 136,
Sample* Job-Mix Formula C117, D 5444
Formula Tolerances
1"
3/4"
1/2"
3/8"
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16 * Uncompacted
No 30 Behind paver
No 50 ** total mix basis
No 100 *** total aggregate
No 200 Basis

Plant
EXTRACTION DATA-ASTM D6307 Sample*
Setting**
(method B excerpt sec. 12) % AC

Aggregate Type %*** Aggregate Type %***

LOT DENSITY SHALL BE TIED TO THE LOT AND DATE


Laboratories shall conform to ASTM D 3666.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 12


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2.03 ASPHALT MIXING PLANT


Plants used by the Contractor for preparation of the asphalt paving mix shall conform to the
following requirements:
A. Field Testing Laboratory: The Contractor shall provide a laboratory building or room at the
plant site, for the exclusive use of the Engineer for performing tests, keeping records, and
making reports at such times as the Engineer is performing those actions.
The Contractor shall also furnish necessary laboratory sieves and a powered shaker device
for sieve analysis, scales, extractor and supplementary equipment to make aggregate sieve
analysis, asphaltic concrete paving mixture analysis, and paving mixture density tests.
B. The asphalt producer shall establish a quality control plan and shall maintain records. The
quality control plan required by the state highway agency is a suggested standard.

2.04 TRANSPORTATION OF MIX


The mix shall be transported to the job site in vehicles with tight metal bottoms, clean of all
foreign material which may affect the mix. If a release agent is used, it must comply with State
and Federal environmental regulations. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be so scheduled
that all materials delivered may be placed in daylight unless the Engineer approves artificial
light. Delivery of the material to the paver shall be at a uniform rate and in an amount within the
capacity of the paving and compacting equipment.
Haul trucks shall be provided with covers of sufficient size and weight to completely cover the
truck bed to protect the load and to prevent cooling of the upper surface. Failure to have the
load completely covered shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire load. The load shall
remain covered until the truck is next in line to be unloaded. In no case shall a load remain
uncovered for more than 10 minutes before starting to use the load. If for any reason there is a
delay in completely using a load, the remaining part of the load shall be recovered until it can be
used. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform all truck drivers of these provisions
before starting work.

2.05 SCALES AND WEIGHING OF VEHICLES:


The vehicle's tare and gross weight shall be established by actually weighing the vehicle on a
certified scale. The tare weight will be established at least twice each day. The vehicle, when
establishing tare, shall be clean, bed empty, fuel tanks filled and shall have all side and back
boards in place.
A. Measurement by Weight: Measurement will be made by weighing each truck load on
scales conforming to the requirements of 2205.6 B “Vehicle Scales” of APWA Construction
and Material Specifications.
B. Vehicle Scales: Vehicle scales shall be approved by the engineer and shall conform to the
requirements specified herein. The specifications, tolerances, and other technical
requirements for weighing and measuring devices as recommended by the National
Conference on Weights and Measures and published in the National Institute of Standards
and Technology Handbook 44, Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical
Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices, and supplements thereto or revisions
thereof, shall apply to all vehicles scales used.
C. Scale Acceptance: Scale acceptance shall be based on one of the following:
1. A valid certification or seal of approval by the Division of Weights and Measures from
the state.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 13


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2. A certification of calibration from a commercial scale service company showing that the
scale meets the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall furnish the
certification of calibration to the Engineer.
D. Scale Calibration: Scales shall have been calibrated within the nine month period prior to
any material being delivered, or at any time the Engineer has cause to question the
accuracy of the scale. Scales shall meet the requirements of Accuracy Class III L as
defined in Handbook 44 (above).
Verification of a vehicle scale may be required by weighing a hauling unit on another
recently calibrated and certified scale.
If equipment to be weighed is of such length that all axles cannot be weighed
simultaneously, a level paved surface shall be provided permitting those axles not on the
scale platform to be supported by the paved surface. The approach shall be at least as
wide as the platform and of sufficient length to insure the level positioning of vehicles during
weight determinations. The weighing shall be performed with all brakes released. If
equipment to be weighed is equipped with an air bag suspension unit on any axle, the
equipment including semi-trailers or pup trailers shall be weighed on vehicle scales of
sufficient size to weigh all axles of the combination simultaneously.
All cost incurred in obtaining a certification of calibration or verification shall be borne by the
contractor.

2.06 EQUIPMENT
All asphalt paving equipment used by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of this section
and shall be maintained in acceptable mechanical condition. Equipment shall be serviced and
lubricated away from the paving site. Units that drip fuel, oil, grease or other fluids shall be
removed from the project until such leakage is corrected.
A. Pavers and Laydown Machines: Mechanical self-powered pavers shall be capable of
spreading the mix within the specified tolerances, true to the line, grade and crown
indicated on the plans.
Pavers shall be equipped with quick and efficient steering devices and shall be capable of
traveling both forward and in reverse. They shall be equipped with hoppers and distributing
screws that place the mix evenly in front of the adjustable screeds. They shall be equipped
with either a vibrating screed or a tamping bar immediately preceding a static screed.
There shall be sufficient auxiliary attachments for the paving machine so that it may be
operated to lay the necessary width as determined in the field by the engineer. Vibrating
screed or tamp bars shall be provided for the full width of all paving operations.
The screed shall include a strike-off device which is effective on mixes at workable
temperatures without tearing, shoving or gouging them, and which produces a finished
surface of an even and uniform texture. The screed shall be adjustable as to the height and
crown and shall be equipped with a controlled heating device for use when required.
However, for irregular width paving, hydraulic extensions without tamping bars or a
vibrating screed may be used only along the curb or outer edge of pavement.
1. Automatic Screed Controls: The paver shall be equipped with and use an approved
system capable of automatically controlling the elevation and transverse slope of the
paver screed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. An erected stringline,
traveling stringline or other approved device operating on the roadbed being paved or
the surface of the previously placed lane shall be used to establish the grade
reference. The grade reference device shall operate on either or both sides of the

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 14


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

paver as required and shall be capable of maintaining the desired transverse slope
regardless of changes in the screed elevation.
2. The traveling string-line shall be constructed in such a manner that it does not vibrate
or cause the sensor to make erroneous readings during the laydown operation. The
length of the beam to be used shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be between
20 feet and 40 feet.
3. The use of the automatic screed control devices on asphalt pavers will not be required
for paving small irregular areas, entrances, approaches, or side street connections.
4. Automatic screed control devices will be required for matching the joint with all
previously laid strips, except for those areas noted above.

B. Rollers: Compaction equipment shall consist of vibratory steel wheel, static steel wheel
and pneumatic-tired rollers unless otherwise directed by the engineer. They shall be self-
propelled and equipped with such controls that starting, stopping and reversing direction
can be accomplished without displacing the hot asphaltic concrete pavement.
Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to keep the wheel surfaces clean and
with efficient means of keeping them wet to prevent mixes from sticking. The roller surfaces
shall have no flat areas, openings or projections that will mar the surface of the pavement.
1. Steel-Wheeled Rollers: Steel-Wheeled Rollers shall be vibratory two-axle tandem
rollers. These rollers shall develop contact pressure of 250 to 350 pounds per inch of
width (vibratory mode) or 150 to 180 pounds per inch of width (static). Rollers shall be
in good working condition.
2. Pneumatic-Tired Rollers: Heavy pneumatic-tired rollers shall be self-propelled and
shall consist of two axles on which are mounted an odd number of pneumatic tired
wheels. The roller shall have at least nine pneumatic-tired wheels mounted in such a
manner that the rear group of wheels will not follow in the tracks of the forward group,
but shall be spaced to give essentially uniform coverage with each pass. Axles shall be
mounted in a rigid frame provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast
loading. Tires shall be smooth, inflated to 90 p.s.i. Construction of the roller shall be
such that each wheel is loaded to a minimum of 2,300 pounds.
3. Trench Rollers: Trench rollers shall have an auxiliary wheel that operates outside the
area to be compacted at such a distance from the pavement edge as to cause no
damage thereto. It shall be mounted upon an axle that is adjustable in height. The
auxiliary wheel shall be kept in adjustment so that the compression wheels will develop
a smooth, compacted surface true to crown and grade.
The contact pressure of the compression wheels shall be from 250 to 350 pounds per inch
of width.
In lieu of the above requirements pertaining to non-vibratory compaction equipment,
consideration will be given to use other types of equipment that are capable of producing
equivalent results consistent with the requirements of the specifications.
C. Pressure Distributor: The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and
operated that liquid asphalt at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of
surface up to 15 feet at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.02 to 1.00 gallon per
square yard, with uniform pressure, and with an allowable variation from any specified rate
not to exceed 0.02 gallons per square yard. Distributor equipment shall include a
tachometer, pressure gauges, a calibrated tank and a thermometer for measuring
temperatures of tank contents. Distributors shall be equipped with a power unit for the
Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 15
Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

pump, and full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically. The calibration of all
distributors must be approved by the engineer, and the contractor shall furnish all
equipment, material and assistance necessary if calibration is required.
D. Hand Tools: The Contractor shall provide sufficient lutes, rakes, shovels, tamping tools
and other equipment as required to produce results consistent with the specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Earthwork: All grading and subgrade preparation shall be in compliance with Section 4110
– Grading and Site Preparation and Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization.
B. Site Preparation: The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, and shall have a
properly prepared surface prior to the start of the paving operations. It shall be free from all
loose or foreign material.
Where a base is rough or uneven, a leveling course shall be placed and properly
compacted before the placing of subsequent courses.
When leveling course is not required, all depressions and other irregularities shall be
patched or corrected, and the work approved by the Engineer before the paving operation
begins.
If the surface is to be primed or tacked, it should be done so uniformly in accordance with
the following conditions:
1. Tack Coats: The existing surface shall be free of all dust, loose material, grease or
other foreign material at the time the tack is applied. Any excess surface oil on the
roadway or bituminous joint material will be removed by others without cost to the
contractor before the tack is applied.
2. Prime Coats: The surface to be primed shall be shaped to the required grade and
cross section, shall be free from all ruts, corrugations, segregated material or other
irregularities, and shall be uniformly compacted by rolling. The surface shall be firm
and slightly damp when primer is applied. Delays in priming may necessitate
reprocessing or reshaping to provide a smooth compacted surface.
The surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all structures in
actual contact with asphalt mixes shall be painted with a thin, complete coating of asphaltic
material to provide a closely bonded, watertight joint.
C. Temperature Limitations: When the moisture of the aggregate in the stockpile or from the
dryer interferes with the quality of mix production, or with normal plant operations, or when
pools of water are observed on the surface to be paved, the mixing and placing of hot-mix
asphalt will not be permitted without the permission of the Engineer.
Hot Mix asphalt for base course paving shall not be mixed or placed when the ambient air
or base temperature is below 40º F, or when there is frost in the subgrade or any other time
when weather conditions are unsuitable for the type of material being placed without
expressed approval of the Engineer.
Hot Mix asphalt for surface course paving shall not be mixed or placed when the ambient
air or base temperature is below 50º F, or when there is frost in the subgrade or any other
time when weather conditions are unsuitable for the type of material being placed without
expressed approval of the Engineer.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 16


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Asphalt mix laydown temperatures and rolling times shall conform to the following table:

Minimum Laydown Temperature

Base Temp (°F) 1-1/2” 2” 3” & Greater


40-50 300° F 285° F 275° F

50-60 295° F 280° F 270° F

60-70 285° F 275° F 265° F

70-80 280° F 270° F 265° F

80-90 270° F 265° F 260° F

90+ 265° F 260° F 255° F


12 minutes
Rolling Time 15 minutes 15 minutes

Regardless of the temperature, final acceptance of the asphalt mat shall be based on
density determined in accordance with section 2205.8 (E) of APWA Construction and
Materials Specification. Rolling times shown are maximum times during which target
density must be achieved.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Application of Tack Coats: Asphalt emulsion shall be applied uniformly with a pressure
distributor at the rate specified in the contract, or as revised by the engineer to be within a
minimum of 0.05 and a maximum of 0.15 gallons per square yard. Water may be added to
the asphalt emulsion and mixed therewith in such proportion that the resulting mixture will
contain no more than 50% of added water, the quantity of added water to be approved by
the engineer. The application of the resulting mixture shall be such that the original
emulsion will be spread at the specified rate. The asphalt emulsion shall be heated at the
time of application to a temperature in accordance with the limits provided in Sec 2204.2 of
APWA Construction and Materials Specifications, or as specified in the contract. The tack
shall be properly cured and the tacked surface shall be cleaned of all dirt and surplus sand
before the next course of HMA is placed.
The tack coat shall be applied in such manner as to minimize exposure to vehicular traffic
and, if necessary, to permit one-way traffic without pickup or tracking of the asphalt
emulsion.
B. Application of Prime Coats: Bituminous material shall be applied to the width of the
section to be primed by means of a pressure distributor in a uniform, continuous spread.
The subgrade shall be moistened before the prime is applied. The application rate shall be
as specified in the contract or as approved by the engineer between 0.1 and 0.5 gallons per
square yard. The primer shall be heated at the time of application to a temperature in
accordance with the limits provided in Sec 2204.2 of APWA Construction and Materials
Specifications, or as specified in the contract.
Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material at the junctions of spreads is
not in excess of the specified quantity. Building paper shall be placed over the end of the
previous applications and the joining application shall start on the building paper. Building

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 17


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

paper used shall be removed and satisfactorily disposed of. Pools of primer material
remaining on the surface after the application shall be removed.
When traffic is maintained, not more than one half of the width of the section shall be
treated in one application and one-way traffic will be permitted on the untreated portion of
the roadbed. As soon as the bituminous material has been absorbed by the surface and will
not pick up, traffic shall be routed to the treated portion and the remaining width of the
section will be primed.
The primer shall be properly cured, and the primed surface shall be cleaned of all dirt and
surplus sand before the next course is placed.
C. Application of Sand Cover: If the tack or prime coat is not completely cured within the
maximum specified curing time, and it is necessary to open the section of roadway to traffic,
sufficient sand shall be spread over the surface with a mechanical spreader to blot up the
excess asphalt. The rate of application shall be specified or approved by the Engineer. Prior
to placing an asphalt paving course, all loose sand shall be swept from the primed or
tacked surface.
D. Spreading and Finishing: The spreading and finishing of each course shall be to the
thickness and width indicated on the plans or Special Provisions. The thickness of
individual layers shall not exceed the following for the respective type of mixture. The
suggested minimum lift thickness shall be three times the nominal maximum size of the
mix. Nominal maximum is defined as the first sieve size larger than the sieve which retains
at least 10% of the aggregate by weight.
Maximum Compacted
Asphalt Type
Lift Thickness
Type 1-01 6”
Type 2-01 4”

Type 3-01 3”

Type 4-01 2”
Type 5-01 4”

Type 6-01 3”

Spreading and finishing shall be conducted in the following manner:


1. Mechanical Pavers: The base and surface courses shall be spread and struck-off with
a mechanical paving machine meeting the requirements of Section 2205.7A of APWA
Construction and Materials Specifications, entitled "Pavers and Laydown Machines."
The paving machine shall be operated so that the material does not accumulate and
remain along the sides of the receiving hopper. The wings of the spreader hopper shall
not be emptied (flipped) between truck loads.
(a) Equipment which leaves tracks or indented areas which cannot be corrected in
normal operation, or which produces other permanent blemishes or fails to
produce a satisfactory surface, shall not be used. The screed auger shall be
operated approximately ¾ full and the hopper conveyor shall not be allowed to
run out of material during the paving operation.
(b) Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed to true lines. Lines for the
paver to follow in placing individual lanes will be established parallel to the

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 18


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

centerline of the proposed roadway. The paver shall be positioned; and operated
to follow closely the established line.
(c) Sufficient trucks shall be used to continuously supply asphalt to the paver.
Delays in the paving operation shall be kept to a minimum.
(d) The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the number of passes heavy
equipment makes over uncompleted roadway sections.
(e) When using pavers in echelon, the second paver shall follow the edge of the
material placed by the first paver. The length of each laydown pass shall be
limited, depending on weather conditions, to assure a hot joint and obtain proper
compaction.
(f) As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unrolled
surface shall be checked to determine its uniformity. Segregation of materials
shall not be permitted. If segregation occurs, the spreading operation shall be
immediately suspended until the cause is determined and corrected.
(g) Transverse joints in succeeding courses shall be offset at least 2 feet.
Longitudinal Joints shall be offset at least 6 inches. The longitudinal joints shall
be laid out so that the surface joint is under the lane markings where possible.
(h) Any irregularities in alignment left by the paver shall be corrected by trimming
directly behind the machine. Distortion of the pavement during this operation
shall be avoided.
(i) Edges against which additional pavement is to be placed shall be placed on a
30º (2:1) bevel, or as specified by the engineer. Any irregularities in the surface
of the pavement course shall be corrected directly behind the paver. Excess
material forming high spots shall be removed by a shovel or lute. Indented areas
shall be filled with hot mix and smoothed. Broadcasting of material shall not be
permitted.
2. Hand Spreading: In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is
not practical, the mix may be spread and finished by hand. The material shall be
distributed uniformly to avoid segregation of the coarse and fine aggregate.
Broadcasting of material shall not be permitted. During the spreading operation, all
material shall be thoroughly and uniformly distributed by lutes or rakes. Material that
has formed into lumps and does not break down readily shall be removed. Following
placing and before rolling, the surface shall be checked with templates and
straightedges and all irregularities corrected.
E. Compaction: A minimum of three rollers shall be used for compacting mixes unless
otherwise approved by the engineer. These rollers shall meet the requirements of Section
2205.7B of APWA Construction and Materials Specifications, entitled "Rollers." Additional
rollers shall be used as necessary to provide specified pavement density.
1. Immediately after spreading, each course of the pavement mixture shall be compacted
by rolling. The initial or "breakdown" rolling shall be accomplished with a steel-wheeled
vibratory roller. The pneumatic-tired roller shall be used to knead and compact the
pavement mixture following the initial rolling and preceding the final rolling. Care shall
be exercised in the use of the pneumatic-tired roller to ensure that the pavement
mixture is sufficiently cooled to avoid "picking up" of the mixture on the tires of the
roller, and also to ensure that the pneumatic-tired rolling is completed before the
mixture becomes too cool to allow satisfactory finish rolling. Final, or finish rolling, shall
be done with a steel-wheeled roller. The sequence of rolling operations may be

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 19


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

changed with the approval of the engineer. All rolling shall be longitudinal, starting near
the edge of the pavement. Alternate trips of the roller shall be of slightly different
lengths. The initial rolling shall take place as closely behind the laydown machine as
the temperature and condition of the mat will allow.
2. The motion of the roller shall be slow enough at all times to avoid displacement of the
hot mixture. The initial compaction roll shall be accomplished with the roller drive wheel
leading the tiller wheel. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the
direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected immediately by the
use of rakes and fresh mixture when required. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to
the roller, the wheels shall be kept properly moistened, but excess water will not be
permitted.
3. The surface of the mixture after compaction shall be smooth and true to established
section and grade. Any surface which is segregated, or is in any way defective, shall
be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture at the Contractor's expense, and shall
be immediately compacted to conform with the surrounding area.
F. Rolling Procedure:
1. Thin Layers (Lifts): When placing a thin lift (less than 2 in. compacted thickness) in
single-lane width or full width, the mixture should be rolled in the following sequence:
(a) Transverse joint.
(b) Outside edge.
(c) Breakdown rolling, beginning on the low side.
(d) Intermediate rolling; same procedure as Step 3.
(e) Finish rolling.
2. When paving a thin lift in echelon, or when abutting a previously placed lane or other
lateral restraint, the mixture should be rolled in the following sequence:
(a) Transverse joint.
(b) Longitudinal joint.
(c) Outside edge.
(d) Breakdown rolling, beginning on the low side.
(e) Intermediate rolling; beginning on the low side.
(f) Finish rolling.
3. Thick Layers (Lifts): When placing a thick lift (2 in. or more compacted thickness) in
single-lane width or full width, the mixture should be rolled in the following sequence:
(a) Transverse joint.
(b) Breakdown rolling, beginning 12 to 15 in. interior to the lower unsupported edge.
The return pass shall be made with the edge of the roller 3 inches exterior to the
unsupported edge of the pavement.
(c) Breakdown rolling of outside edge. Repeat the process described in Step 2
above on the other longitudinal edge.
(d) Intermediate rolling, beginning on the low side.
(e) Finish rolling.

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 20


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

4. When paving a thick lift in echelon, or when abutting a previously placed lane or other
lateral restraint, the mixture should be rolled in the following sequence:
(a) Transverse joint.
(b) Longitudinal joint.
(c) Breakdown rolling, beginning at the longitudinal joint.
(d) Intermediate rolling, beginning on the low side.
(e) Finish rolling.
5. When paving in echelon, 2-3 inches of the first mat shall be left unrolled, and rolled
when the joint between the lanes is rolled and after the 2nd mat is placed. Edges shall
not be exposed more than fifteen minutes without being rolled. Particular attention shall
be given to the construction of transverse and longitudinal joints in all courses.
6. In laying a surface mix adjacent to any finished area, it shall be placed sufficiently high
so that, when compacted, the finished surface will be true and uniform. Where the
grade is slight a level will be used to insure drainage to the desired outlet.
G. Transverse Joints: When the transverse joint is next to an adjoining lane, the first pass
shall be made with a static steel-wheeled roller moving along the longitudinal joint for a few
feet. The surface will then be checked with a straightedge and corrections shall be made if
necessary. The joint then shall be rolled transversely, with 6 in. of the drum width on the
newly laid material. This operation shall be repeated with successive passes, each covering
an additional 6 to 8 in. of the new mat, until the entire width of a drive roll is on the new
mixture. During transverse rolling, wooden boards of the proper thickness should be placed
at the edge of the pavement to give the roller a surface to drive on once it passes the edge
of tile Mat. if boards are not used, transverse rolling must stop 6 to 8 in. short of the outside
edge to prevent damaging it, and the edge must be compacted later during longitudinal
rolling. Transverse joints shall be carefully constructed and thoroughly compacted to
provide a smooth riding surface. If the joint has been distorted, it shall be trimmed to a line.
The joint face shall be tacked before the fresh material is placed against it.
H. Longitudinal Joints: Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paving
operation. The edge to be joined shall be tack coated. The paver screed shall be set to
overlap the first mat by 1-2 inches. The elevation of the screed above the surface of the first
mat should be equal to the amount of roll-down expected during compaction of the new
mat. For large aggregate mixes, the coarse aggregate in the material overlapping the cold
joint should be carefully removed and wasted, leaving only the finer portion of the mixture to
be pressed into the compacted lane at the time the joint is rolled. For mixes with smaller
coarse aggregate, such as surface courses, the overlapping material should be pushed with
a lute into a hump over the joint area prior to compaction.
I. Edges: The edges of the pavement shall be rolled concurrently with or immediately after
rolling the longitudinal joint. In rolling pavement edges, roller wheels shall extend 2-4 inches
beyond the pavement edge provided the lateral displacement is not excessive.
J. Breakdown Rolling: Breakdown rolling shall immediately follow the rolling of the
longitudinal joint and edges. Rollers shall be operated as close to the paver as necessary to
obtain adequate density without causing undue displacement. The breakdown roller shall
be operated with the drive wheel nearest the laydown machine. Exceptions may be made
by the Engineer when working on steep slopes or super-elevated curves.
K. Intermediate Rolling: Pneumatic-tired rollers as specified in Section 2205.7B of APWA
Construction and Materials Specifications, entitled "Rollers" shall be used for intermediate

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 21


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

rolling. The intermediate rolling shall follow the breakdown rolling as closely as possible and
while the paving mix is still of a temperature that will result in maximum density from this
operation. Pneumatic-tired rolling shall be continuous after the initial rolling until all of the
mix placed has been compacted to the required density. Turning of pneumatic-tired rollers
on the hot paving mix which causes displacement shall not be permitted.
L. Finish Rolling: The finish rolling shall be accomplished while the material is still warm
enough for the removal of roller marks. All roller marks shall be removed by the finish rolling
operation. All rolling operations shall be conducted in close sequence.
M. Inaccessible Locations: In places inaccessible for the operation of standard rollers as
specified, compaction shall be performed by trench rollers or others meeting the
requirements of Section 2205.7B of APWA Construction and Materials Specifications,
entitled "Rollers." The trench roller shall be operated until the lift is thoroughly compacted.
Hand tamping, manual or mechanical, may be used in such areas, if such operations will
give the required density.
N. Density and Surface Requirements: The completed asphalt concrete paving shall have a
density equal to or greater than 95% for Type 1-01 and 5-01 Asphalt Concrete Base and
96% for Types 2-01, 3-01, 4-01, 5-01 and 6-01 Asphalt Concrete Surface. Density is based
on laboratory specimens prepared as specified in Section 2205.3B of APWA Construction
and Materials Specifications, entitled "Mix Design Criteria" and made from plant mix
conforming to the job mix formula. Density testing shall conform to ASTM D 2950 or ASTM
D 2726 or D 1188.
If cores are used to determine density, one or more tests (one test equals three cores) will
be taken for each tonnage lot and averaged to determine acceptance. Two cores will be
taken from the lane being paved, and one core centered on the longitudinal joint with the
adjoining lane. The Engineer will mark the locations of all cores.
1. The compacted surface shall be 0-1/4 in. above the edge of curb. All unsatisfactory
work shall be repaired, replaced or corrected. The surface of the final course shall be
of a uniform texture and conform to line and grade shown on the plans.
2. The field control density will be based on the density of plant produced mix
compacted in a laboratory in accordance with Section 2205.3 (C) of APWA
Construction and Materials Specifications.
O. Smoothness Requirements: This item governs the furnishing of all labor, materials and
equipment for the determination of pavement surface smoothness, evaluation of results,
and corrective actions as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Contract
Documents, Standard Drawings, the specifications and the Special Provisions.
1. Profilograph equipment, testing, and evaluation shall be performed in accordance with
KDOT Sections 603. Within two days after the paving, furnish the Engineer with the
profilogram and its evaluation.
2. Profilographing shall be performed on roadways classified as arterials and major
collectors.
3. Finished pavements on local roads, minor collectors and other areas exempted from
profilographing shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge placed parallel to the
center line at any location within a driving lane. Areas showing high spots of more than
1/4 of an inch in 10 feet shall be marked and ground down with approved grinding
equipment to an elevation where the area or spot will not show surface deviations in
excess of 1/8 inch when tested with a 10 foot straight edge. Grinding will be performed
on the full width of the lane failing to meet the smoothness criteria. The cost of

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 22


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

correcting the smoothness and associated traffic control shall be at Contractor’s


expense.
4. Corrective actions shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense and in accordance
KDOT 603.
5. The Contractor shall submit a final report to the Engineer with final profilograph results
verifying compliance with the specified pavement smoothness requirements.
6. No pay adjustments (incentive or disincentive) shall be made to the smoothness or
pavement items based on the results of the profilograph testing.

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 ASPHALT PAVEMENT


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured or certified delivery tickets if tons is the
preferred unit of measure.
B. Unit: Square Yards or tenth part thereof, or tons if specified in the Contract documents.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Placement, compaction,
testing, asphalt, tack, prime, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit
price of the asphalt pavement. If tons is the method of measurement, any excess material
not placed shall be estimated and subtracted from the last delivery ticket.
D. Asphalt Price Indexing (API): API will be used on all Capital Improvement Program
projects for asphalt base and asphalt surface. Adjustments will be made to the unit
prices used to determine payments due to the Contractor for any asphalt base or
asphalt surface when the monthly average price for the asphalt cement used for the
asphalt base or surface has fluctuated from the price determined on the month the
project was bid. Adjustment calculations are based on PG64-22, but will apply equally
to all grades of asphaltic cement. The price adjustment will be applied to the percent of
virgin asphalt binder used in the mix design of the asphalt approved for the project.
The computed monthly Asphalt Material Index (AMI) to be used is listed at the following
web site: http://www.ksdot.org:9080/burconsmain/ppreq/AsphaltPriceIndex.asp.
The difference (plus or minus) between the Starting Asphalt Index (SAI) and Asphalt
Material Index (AMI) for that month is the Monthly Asphalt Index Adjustment Factor
(MAIAF). The MAIAF will only be applied with the increase or decrease differs $10.00
or more from the SAI.
To determine the adjustment for any material specified in this specification the following
formula will be used.
A = (B X C) X (D-E)
Where: A = Adjustment in dollars for mix placed during monthly average index
B = Tons of Mix Placed during the monthly average index
C = % of virgin asphalt binder as listed in the job mix formula
D = Monthly average price at time of mix placement or AMI
E = Monthly average price at time of bid (January 2009) or SAI

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 23


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

The Contractor shall submit a Change Order for all adjustment payments (or
deductions) for the applicable work completed at monthly intervals. If the working
completion date expires, payments (or deductions) will continue to be applied, but the
adjustment will be based on the index for the month the project calendar completion
date expired.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4205 - 24


Section 4205 Asphalt Pavement Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4210 – CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, tools, and materials necessary to
construct concrete pavement.

1.02 REFERENCES
All construction covered in this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 4405 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete
A. KDOT Standard Specification:
1. Section 154.5 Slip Form Paving Equipment
2. Section 502 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
3. Section 503 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Smoothness
B. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the specifications of the Kansas City Metro Materials
Board (KCMMB) 4k mix. Mix designs shall be approved KCMMB mixes.

2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Paving Machine: The paving machine shall be equipped with mechanical internal
vibrators, and with assistance of electronics, be capable of placing the Portland Cement
Concrete pavement to the correct cross-section, thickness, line and grade within the
allowable tolerances as set forth in this document.
B. Vibratory Screed: In areas where it is not feasible to use a self-propelled paving machine
a screed with a vibratory attachment may be used in place of the finishing machine.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Earthwork: All grading and subgrade preparation shall be in compliance with Section 4110
– Grading and Site Preparation and Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization.
B. Temperature Limitations: Concrete work shall proceed in accordance with the
temperature requirements established in Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

Division 4200 Streets 4210 - 1


Section 4210 Concrete Pavement 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Placement: Refer for Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for placement requirements.
B. Finishing: The pavement shall be struck off and consolidated with a mechanical finishing
machine or by hand-finishing methods.
When a mechanical finishing machine is used, the concrete shall be struck off at such a
height that after consolidation and final finishing it shall be at the exact elevations as shown
on the plans. A depth of at least two (2) inches of concrete shall be carried in front of the
strike-off screed for the full width of the slab, whenever the screed is being used to strike off
the pavement. The finishing machine shall be provided with a screed which will consolidate
the concrete by pressure. The concrete shall, through the use of this machine, be brought
to a true and even surface, free from rock pockets, with the fewest possible number of
passes of the machine. The edge of the screeds along the curb line may be notched out to
allow for sufficient concrete to form the integral curb.
When hand finishing is used, the pavement shall be struck off and consolidated by a
vibrating screed to the exact elevation as shown on the plans. When the forward motion of
the vibrating screed is stopped, the vibrator shall be shut off; it shall not be allowed to idle
on the concrete. Internal mechanical vibration shall be used along all formed surfaces.
1. Floating: After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be further
smoothed by means of a mechanical float or float finishers using a hand float. If a
hand float is used, it shall be operated from foot bridges spanning the pavement and
shall be worked with a wiping motion parallel to the centerline, and passing from one
side of the pavement to the other. Movement ahead along the centerline of the
pavement shall be in successive advances of not more than one half of the length of
the float. The float shall not be less than twelve (12) feet in length and six (6) inches in
width, and shall be properly stiffened and provided with handles at each end. This
operation may be eliminated if specified tolerances can be attained by some other
approved method.
In cases where it is not possible to use the floating operation described above, the
pavement shall be scraped with a straight edge ten (10) feet long, equipped with a
handle to permit it to be operated from the edge of the pavement. The float and
straight edge shall be operated so that any excess water and laitance are removed
from the surface of the pavement. After the scraping operation, the surface of the
pavement shall be within the specified tolerances.
2. Straight Edging: While the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be checked for
smoothness with a ten (10) foot straightedge swung from handles three feet longer
than one-half the width of the slab. The straightedge shall be placed on the surface
parallel to the centerline of the pavement and at not more than five (5) foot intervals
transversely. After each check, the straightedge shall be moved forward one-half its
length and the operation repeated. When irregularities are discovered, they shall be
corrected by adding or removing concrete. All disturbed places shall be smoothed with
a float not less than three (3) feet long and not less than six (6) inches wide, and again
straight-edged.
3. Edging: Before final finishing is completed and before the concrete has taken its initial
set, the edges of the slab and curb shall be carefully finished with an edger of the
radius shown on the plans or standard details.
4. Final Surface Finish: A burlap drag or a broom finish shall be used as the final finishing
method. When a drag is used it shall be at least three (3) feet in width and long
enough to cover the entire pavement width. It shall be kept clean and saturated while
Division 4200 Streets 4210 - 2
Section 4210 Concrete Pavement 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

in use. It shall be laid on the surface of the pavement and dragged in the direction in
which the pavement is being laid. When broom finishing, a hard bristle broom shall be
used. The broom shall be kept clean and used in such a manner as to provide a
uniform textured surface. The curb shall have the same final finish as the pavement.
The final surface of the concrete pavement and curb shall have a uniform gritty texture
free from excessive harshness and true to the grades and cross section shown on the
plans. The pavement surface shall have no depressions in which water will stand. The
Engineer may require changes in the final finishing procedure as required to produce
the desired final surface texture.
C. Curing: Refer for Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for curing requirements.
D. Joints: Refer for Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for jointing requirements.
E. Smoothness: Concrete pavement smoothness shall comply with KDOT Section 503
except as modified by F.6 and F.7 below; however, table 503-2 and table 503-3 related to
price adjustment shall not apply.
F. Diamond Grinding: From the results of the smoothness review, diamond grinding may be
required to reduce or eliminate irregularities of the pavement surface.
1. Use a self-propelled grinding machine with diamond blades mounted on a multi-blade
arbor. Avoid using equipment that causes excessive ravels, aggregate fractures, or
spalls.
2. Provide uniform texture the full width of the lane. Transverse grooving will not be
required.
3. Use vacuum equipment or other continuous methods to remove grinding slurry and
residue. Prevent the grinding slurry from flowing across lanes being used by traffic.
4. After corrections have been made to the riding surface, test the pavement for
smoothness using the same technique used to determine smoothness originally.
Furnish and operate the smoothness measurement equipment, and evaluate the
results as specified.
5. Where smoothness is determined through the use of a profilograph, run two traces in
each lane that has been corrected. Run a trace three (3) feet from the longitudinal joint
between lanes and another trace three (3) feet from the shoulder or curb edge of the
lane. A trained and certified operator shall perform the profilograph testing and
evaluation.
6. Within two (2) days after the corrections to the riding surface are made, furnish the City
Engineer with the profilogram and its evaluation. Evaluate the profilogram of the
corrected riding surface in two hundred and fifty (250) foot sections per lane. The
required profile index per trace is fifteen (15) inches per mile.
7. Perform additional grinding as required to attain the required profile index. Correct all
deviations (in excess of one half (1/2) inch in a length of twenty-five (25) feet) within
each section regardless of the profile index value.
G. Thickness Tolerances: Pavement shall be constructed strictly in accordance with the
thickness shown on the plans. The thickness of any pavement in question may be
measured by coring at the Contractors expense, and where any pavement is found
deficient in thickness, it will be compensated for at an adjusted unit price or shall be
removed and replaced as determined by the Engineer.
In removing pavement, it shall be removed from the outside edge of the curb and gutter
(curb and gutter with tie-bars or keyway may remain if in good condition) to a longitudinal
Division 4200 Streets 4210 - 3
Section 4210 Concrete Pavement 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

joint, or between longitudinal joints, and on each side of the deficient measurement until no
portion of the exposed cross sections are more than 2/10-inch deficient, except that there
shall not be less than five (5) linear feet of pavement removed. If there remains less than
ten (10) feet of acceptable pavement between the section that has been removed and a
transverse contraction, expansion, or construction joint, the contractor shall remove
pavement to the joint.

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 CONCRETE PAVEMENT


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Square Yards.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Reinforcement steel, joint
material, testing (not completed by the City), coring, curing compounds, concrete, and other
appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit price of the concrete pavement.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4210 - 4


Section 4210 Concrete Pavement 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4215 – CONCRETE PAVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment, tools, and materials and the
performance of all work necessary to install concrete pavers.

1.02 GENERAL
Concrete pavers shall be used in medians or as shown within the Construction Documents.

1.03 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board: (www.kcmmb.org)
B. ASTM: C936/C936M – Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Color Verification: Prior to placement of the concrete pavers, the Contractor shall submit
a sample for each type of paver to the City Engineer for color verification. No paver shall
be installed prior to sample approval by the City Engineer.
B. Installer: The concrete paver Contractor shall have at least two (2) years related
experience in the installation of interlocking concrete pavers. The City may request
verification of previous experience prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pavers: Pavers shall meet the requirements of ASTM C936/C936M and shall be certified
as meeting those requirements by an independent testing lab.
1. Pavers shall be obtained from one source to ensure product consistency.
2. Pavers shall be 2-3/8 inches thick.
3. Pavers in medians shall be “antique red” in color unless otherwise shown within the
Construction Documents.
B. Concrete: The concrete base course shall conform to the specifications of the Kansas City
Metro Materials Board (KCMMB) 4k mix. Mix designs shall be an approved KCMMB mix.
Installation of the concrete base course shall be the responsibility of the paver stone
Contractor.
C. Sand: The sand laying course shall be well graded, clean washed, sharp sand with one
hundred percent (100%) passing a 3/8-inch sieve size and a maximum of three percent
(3%) passing a No. 200 sieve size. The required sand is commonly known as

Division 4200 Streets 4215 - 1


Section 4215 Concrete Pavers 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

manufactured concrete sand, limestone screening, or similar. Mason sand shall not be
permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Weather Limitations: Concrete pavers shall not be installed on frozen sand or during
snow or rain events.
B. Earthwork: All grading and subgrade preparation shall be in compliance with Section 4110
– Grading and Site Preparation and Section 4120 – Subgrade Stabilization.

3.02 INSTALLATION
Concrete pavers shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and the following
additional requirements:
A. Delivery and Storage: Pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at the jobsite on pallets
and bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product during handling,
hauling, and unloading. Pavers shall be stored by the Contractor in a manner to avoid
damage.
B. Concrete Base Course: The concrete base course shall be shaped to the grade and
cross-section as shown within the Construction Documents with an allowable tolerance of
one-quarter (1/4) inch.
C. Sand Bedding: The uncompacted sand laying course shall be spread evenly over the
area to be paved and then screeded to a level that will produce a uniform one (1) inch
thickness after the paver stones have been placed and vibrated. Once screeded and
leveled to the desired elevation, the sand laying course shall not be disturbed in any way
and shall be protected from wind and rain.
D. Pavers: The pavers shall be placed in the pattern as shown within the Construction
Documents. Pavers shall be set tight with 1/16- to 1/8-inch wide joints.
All edges of the installed pavers shall be restrained by the concrete curb, concrete
sidewalk, or other approved method of preventing the movement of edge stones. The gaps
at the edge of the paver surface shall be filled with standard edge stones or with stones cut
to fit. Pavers shall be cut with a masonry saw or a double bladed splitter saw. Gaps at
edges of 3/8-inch and smaller shall be filled with sand.
Pavers shall be compacted to their final surface elevation as follows:
1. The Contractor shall use a vibrating compactor capable of three thousand (3,000) to
five thousand (5,000) pounds of centrifugal compaction force.
2. The Contractor shall sweep dry sand into the joints and vibrate until the joints are
completely full. A minimum of two passes shall be completed.
3. Surplus material shall be swept from the surface and shall be disposed of appropriately
off-site.
After final vibrating, the surface shall be inspected and shall not vary more than 1/4-inch
when checked with a 10-foot straight-edge at any location on the surface.

Division 4200 Streets 4215 - 2


Section 4215 Concrete Pavers 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 CONCRETE PAVERS


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Square feet
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. The concrete base course,
sand, pavers, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit price of the
concrete pavers.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4215 - 3


Section 4215 Concrete Pavers 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4220 – CURB

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the construction of all types of concrete curb and other appurtenant work.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE
All construction covered in this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 4405 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete. All curb construction shall be performed prior to the placement of
adjacent pavement for sidewalk or shared use path, except when otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board: (www.kcmmb.org)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the specifications of the Kansas City Metro Materials
Board (KCMMB) 4k mix. Mix designs shall be an approved KCMMB mix.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Earthwork: All grading and subgrade preparation shall be in compliance with Section 4110
– Grading and Site Preparation and Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization.

3.02 INSTALLATION
Concrete curb construction shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and the
following additional requirements:
A. Line and Grade: The curb shall be accurately placed in accordance with the line and
grade established within the Construction Documents.
B. Concrete Placement: A slip form machine shall be required for all continuous curb
construction of lengths greater than two hundred fifty (250) feet, unless another method of
placement is approved by the City Engineer. If using a slip form machine, the concrete
shall be consolidated with an approved internal type vibrator. The slip form machine shall
use a mule that matches the City’s cross-section as shown within the Standard Details. No
exceptions.
If hand placed, the surface shall be shaped by the use of a steel tool to produce the cross-
section as shown within the Standard Details. Edges shall be tooled to form a radius as
shown in the details.

Division 4200 Streets 4220 - 1


Section 4220 Curb 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

C. Finishing: The surface shall be finished with a wooden or steel float and broomed.
Brooming shall be perpendicular to the curb line. The brooming operation shall be so
executed that the marks will be uniform in appearance and not more than 1/16-inch in
depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete has attained its initial set.
D. Asphalt Base: When the curb is placed on an asphaltic concrete base, with a minimum
depth of three (3) inches, reinforcing steel is not required.
E. Joints: If curb is hand placed, all joints shall be tooled.
F. Surface Tolerances: The finished surface of the curb shall be checked for no more than
1/4-inch deviation, by the use of a 10-foot straightedge. Where grades are flat and while
the concrete is still plastic, the drainage of the gutter should be checked with a 4-foot
carpenter’s level.
All curb shall be placed to provide positive drainage with no ponding.
G. Curing: Curbs shall be cured in accordance with Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
H. Backfilling: Backfill material and methods shall be in accordance with Section 4405 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.03 WARRANTY
During the maintenance period, the Contractor is responsible for the repair and/or replacement
of damaged curb or curb that does not exhibit positive drainage. The City Engineer will inspect
the curb as part of the maintenance period and will determine the sections of curb that require
removal and/or replacement due to defects including but not limited to cracks, chips, spalling,
ponding, and settlement.
A. Removal: Existing curb that is to be removed shall be accomplished in accordance with
the Standard Details for the type of removal specified in the plans. The curb shall be
removed to the nearest joint, or two (2) foot minimum and the joint shall be cut to full depth
prior to removal.
B. Repair: Minor curb repairs due to chips or cracks shall be repaired using a five thousand
(5000) psi non-shrink grout unless another repair method is approved by the City Engineer.
More severe defects shall require full replacement.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 CURB
A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Linear Feet.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Reinforcement steel, joint
material, curing compounds, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the
unit price of the curb. When the plans indicate removal of existing curb, the removal shall
be subsidiary to the new curb.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4220 - 2


Section 4220 Curb 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4225 – SIDEWALKS AND DRIVE APPROACHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers all sidewalk and drive approach construction and other appurtenant work.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS


All construction covered in this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 4405 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the specifications of the KCMMB4k mix. Mix designs
shall be an approved KCMMB mix.
B. Aggregate: Concrete shall conform to the specifications of KDOT Section 1100.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Location: All public sidewalks shall be located within the public rights-of-way or within a
public sidewalk easement.
All portions of a drive approach located with the public rights-of-way shall be constructed
per Standard Details 3226, 3226-1, and 3227.
B. Subgrade: Refer to Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization.
C. Granular Base Course: Sidewalks shall be placed on a KDOT AB-3 granular base course,
unless one of the following exceptions applies:
1. The sidewalk is placed as part of building permit for a single family or multi-family
dwelling unit.
2. The sidewalk is placed in sections less than one hundred (100) linear feet in
continuous length and is not part of a new development.
Sidewalks that fall under one of the above exceptions may be placed on a four (4) inch
clean rock (3/4-inch) base course in lieu of KDOT AB-3.
Refer to Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization and the Standard Details for KDOT AB-3
placement requirements.

Division 4200 Streets 4225 - 1


Section 4225 Sidewalk and Drive Approaches 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.02 INSTALLATION
Sidewalks and drive approaches shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and
the following additional requirements:
A. Line and Grade: The sidewalk and drive approach shall be accurately placed in
accordance with the line and grade established within the Construction Documents.
B. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be hand placed or, at the option of the Contractor,
the sidewalk can be placed using a slip form machine equipped with electronics. The
Contractor shall use forms to establish the correct dimensions and line and grade. If a slip
form machine is used, the concrete shall be consolidated with an approved internal type
vibrator.
Edges shall be tooled to form a radius.
C. Sidewalk Finishing: The surface shall be finished with a wooden or steel float and
broomed. Brooming shall be transverse to the length of the sidewalk. The brooming
operation shall be so executed that the marks will be uniform in appearance and not more
than 1/16-inch in depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in such
condition that it will be torn or unduly roughened and before the concrete has attained its
initial set.
Unless otherwise noted within the Contract Documents, the sidewalk shall have a 3”
“picture-frame” finish. For rehabilitation work where the existing sidewalk is not picture-
frame finished, finish may match existing field conditions.
D. Drive Approach Finishing: The surface shall be finished with a wooden or steel float and
broomed. Brooming shall be transverse to the center of the approach. The brooming
operation shall be so executed that the marks will be uniform in appearance and not more
than 1/16-inch in depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in such
condition that it will be torn or unduly roughened and before the concrete has attained its
initial set.
E. Joints: If the sidewalk is hand placed, all contraction joints shall be tooled.
Expansion joints shall be constructed at locations where the sidewalk or drive approach
abuts existing concrete curbs, sidewalk, driveways, and similar structures, at two hundred
fifty (250) foot intervals along the sidewalk and as shown within the Construction
documents.
F. Surface Tolerances: The finished surface of the concrete shall be checked for no more
than 1/4-inch deviation, by the use of a 10-foot straightedge. Where grades are flat and
while the concrete is still plastic, the drainage of the concrete should be checked with a 4-
foot carpenter’s level.
All sidewalk and drive approaches shall be placed to provide positive drainage with no
ponding.
G. Curing: Concrete shall be cured in accordance with Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
H. Backfilling: Backfill material and methods shall be in accordance with Section 4405 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.03 WARRANTY
During the maintenance period, the Contractor is responsible for the repair and/or replacement
of damaged concrete or concrete that does not exhibit positive drainage. The City Engineer will

Division 4200 Streets 4225 - 2


Section 4225 Sidewalk and Drive Approaches 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

inspect the sidewalk and drive approaches as part of the maintenance period and will determine
the sections of concrete that require removal and/or replacement due to defects including but
not limited to cracks, chips, spalling, ponding, and settlement.
A. Removal: Existing concrete that is to be removed shall be removed to the nearest joint;
the joint shall be cut to full depth prior to removal.
B. Repair: Minor concrete repairs due to chips or cracks shall be repaired using a five
thousand (5000) psi non-shrink grout unless another repair method is approved by the City
Engineer. More severe defects shall require full replacement.

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 SIDEWALK
A. Method of Measurement: Field measurement of in-place concrete
B. Unit: Square feet
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Joint material, curing
compounds, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit price of the
sidewalk. When the plans indicate removal of existing sidewalk, the removal shall be
subsidiary to the new drive approach. When the plans indicate removal of existing curb, the
removal shall be subsidiary to the new curb.

4.02 DRIVE APPROACH


A. Method of Measurement: Field measurement of in-place concrete
B. Unit: Square feet
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Joint material, curing
compounds, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the unit price of the
sidewalk. When the plans indicate removal of existing drive approach, the removal shall be
subsidiary to the new approach. When the plans indicate removal of existing curb, the
removal shall be subsidiary to the new curb.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4225 - 3


Section 4225 Sidewalk and Drive Approaches 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4230 – SHARED USE PATH

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers materials and installation for a shared use path.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, and samples shall be submitted by Contractor in
accordance with the submittal requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


Contractor shall make arrangements for a pre-installation meeting with Engineer, Owner,
subcontractors, and suppliers prior to installation to discuss status of shop drawing approvals,
inspection and testing procedures, subcontractor coordination, schedule, and other items as
appropriate.

1.04 REFERENCES
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)
B. ASTM C1059 – Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete – Type II

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
Concrete shall be an approved KCMMB4k mix.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Earthwork: Excavation and embankments for shared use path shall be completed in
accordance with Section 4110 – Grading and Site Preparation.
B. Subgrade: Subgrade preparation and stabilization for recreational trails shall be
completed in accordance with Section 4115 - Subgrade Stabilization.
C. Granular Base Course: Granular base course for shared use path shall be installed in
accordance with Section 4115 – Subgrade Stabilization.

Division 4200 Streets 4230 - 1


Section 4230 Shared Use Path 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.02 FORMS
Form installation is specified in Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete, and the following
additional requirements.
A. Curves: Materials used to form curves for shared use path shall be flexible and shall provide
smooth curves which deviate no more than ¼ inch from the radius indicated on the Drawings.
B. Slip-Form Equipment: At Contractor’s option, concrete for shared use path may be placed
utilizing hand-placed forms or slip-form equipment. Slip-form equipment shall be outfitted
with adequate electronics to establish line and grade and equipped with an internal type
vibrator for consolidation of concrete.

3.03 JOINTS
A. Expansion Joints. ¾-inch preformed joint filler material shall be used for expansion joints
and shall be placed at locations where the shared use path abuts other structures, and at
one hundred-fifty (150) foot intervals. Expansion joints shall be placed at right angles to the
centerline of the shared use path. Expansion joints shall extend the full depth of the slab and
secured to prevent movement during concrete placement.
B. Contraction Joints. Contraction joints shall be located to create square panels and shall be
placed at right angles to the centerline of the shared use path. Contraction joints shall be saw
cut and shall be one (1) inch deep and one-eighth (1/8) inch wide. Hand-tooled contraction
joints are not allowed.
C. Construction Joints. Install construction joints as indicated on the Drawings. If not shown
on the Drawings, locate construction joints so not to impair strength and appearance of the
concrete and as acceptable to Engineer. Place construction joints perpendicular to main
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings.

3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT


Concrete shall be placed as specified in Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.05 FINISHING
Concrete surface shall be finished with a wood or steel float. Slightly roughen the surface
immediately after floating with a fiber bristle broom at right angles to the centerline of the shared
use path. The broom finish shall be uniform in appearance and not more than 1/16-inch in depth.
Contractor shall not apply a “picture frame” finish to the concrete surface.
The edge of the shared use path shall be hand-tooled to form a quarter (1/4) inch radius prior to
application of the broom finish.

3.06 SURFACE TOLERANCES

The longitudinal surface of the shared use path shall not deviate more than ¼-inch when
checked with a 10- foot straight edge. The cross-slope of the shared use path shall be checked
for trueness using a template having the required slope.

3.07 CURING
Concrete curing is specified in Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

Division 4200 Streets 4230 - 2


Section 4230 Shared Use Path 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.08 PROTECTION
Protection of concrete is specified in Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.09 REPAIRS
A. Major Defects: Repair major defects including, but not limited to, cracks which penetrate
completely through the slab regardless of width and honeycombing. Repair major defects by
complete removal of the slab to the nearest joint.
B. Minor Defects: Repair minor defects affecting durability of concrete including, but not
limited to, crazing, chips, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide, spalling, and pop-outs.
Cut out areas with minor defects and replace with concrete. Remove defective areas to
sound concrete with clean, square cuts but in no case shall depth of cuts be less than one
(1) inch. Dampen existing concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent. Patching concrete shall be same concrete mix as original concrete.
Repair methods for minor defects other than specified above and proposed by Contractor
shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 SHARED USE PATH


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measure
B. Unit: Square Yard
C. Payment: Payment for shared use path shall be made at the unit price bid. Unit price shall
include forming, joint installation, sawcutting, placing and consolidating, finishing, curing, and
protection of concrete.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4230 - 3


Section 4230 Shared Use Path 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4200 STREETS

SECTION 4235 – SUBGRADE STABILIZATION

1.01 GENERAL
This section covers the preparation of subgrade and foundation treatment for pavement,
sidewalks, recreational trails, and drive approaches.
A. Specifications to be Used: All subgrade stabilization shall be performed in accordance
with the Division II – Construction and Material Specifications, Section 2202 – Subgrade
Stabilization published by the Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter of the American Public
Works Association except as amended below.

1.02 REFERENCE
The following standards are directly referenced in this section. The latest version of these
standards shall be used.
A. AASHTO:
1. T99 – T 99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-
kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop
2. M 216: Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stablilization
B. APWA, Kansas City Metropolitan Chapter (KC-APWA):
1. Section 2202 – “Subgrade Stabilization”
C. ASTM:
1. C 25 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime, and
Hydrated Lime
2. C 150 – 07 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
3. C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete
4. D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
5. D 5239 – Standard Practice for Characterizing Fly Ash for Use in Soil Stabilization
6. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method
7. D 6938 – Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
D. KDOT Standard Specifications:
1. Section 303 – Cement or Fly Ash Treated Subgrade
2. Section 1104 – Aggregates for Aggregate Base Construction
3. Section 2005 - Fly Ash for Stabilization, Modification and cold Recycle Asphalt Material

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 1


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

1.03 AMENDMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS


The following amendments and modifications shall apply to Subgrade Stabilization.
A. Section 2201.4: The following shall be added to this section:
“F. Unsuitable Materials
When unstable or unsuitable materials are encountered, they shall be removed to the depth
required to reach stable material or as directed by the Engineer. The over-excavated area
shall be backfilled with suitable material as defined in Section 4110 – Earthwork, or KDOT
AB-3 aggregate material may be used if allowed by the Engineer. Backfilled subgrade shall
be compacted in accordance with the requirements of this Section.”
B. Section 2201.4.C: This section shall be removed and replaced with the following:
“F. Protection and Maintenance of Subgrade
The newly finished subgrade shall be repaired from action of the elements or others. Any
action (e.g. settlement or erosion) that damages the subgrade or any subgrade that has
become unacceptable prior to placing the pavement thereon, shall be repaired and the
specific lines, grades, cross-section, tolerance, density, and moisture content range
reestablished.
The Contractor shall protect all pavements, curbs, sidewalks, and recreational trails from
subgrade operation with an earth cushion, timber planking, or both where tractors, graders,
rollers, or other equipment are required to pass, or turn around. All resulting damage shall be
repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
The contractor shall maintain, at his/her own expense, the entire treated subgrade in good
condition from the start of work until all the work has been completed, cured, and the
pavement is placed.”
C. Section 2202.3.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Fly Ash
Fly Ash shall comply with the physical requirements of ASTM D 5239, paragraph 6.4
maintaining a minimum compressive strength of 500 psi at 7 days and the chemical
requirements of ASTM C 618, Table 1 for Class C fly ash, unless otherwise shown on the
Plans. The source of the ash shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer in advance of stabilization operations in order that the required laboratory tests can
be completed prior to construction without delaying the work. The fly ash source shall also
be prequalified with KDOT as required by KDOT Section 2005. Certification shall be provided
by the supplier that the fly ash used on the project meets the above criteria. Fly ash shall be
stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until distribution. Fly ash exposed to
moisture prior to mixing with soils shall be discarded.
A certification indicating compliance to these specifications shall be attached to or be part of
the scale ticket for each load delivered. The producer’s representative shall sign the
certification. The Contractor shall provide weigh tickets from a certified public scale to the
Engineer for each load of fly ash delivered to the site.”
D. Section 2202.3.B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“B. Lime
Lime shall be hydrated or quicklime conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 216.
Contractor shall provide certification that the product complies. Hydrated lime shall contain
not less than ninety (90) percent calcium hydroxide Ca(OH)2, and quicklime shall have a

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 2


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

minimum available lime percentage (CaO) of 90%, as determined by ASTM C 25. Lime shall
be introduced to the subgrade in a slurry form. When quicklime is used, slake it at the jobsite
to manufacture hydrated lime slurry. The Contractor shall submit calculations to the Engineer
that determines the amount of water needed to make a slurry with a percent solids between
20 and 40 percent. The Contractor will then determine the concentration strength of the lime
slurry and the rate of application to obtain the lime percentage specified in the Contract
Documents.
A certification indicating compliance to these specifications shall be attached to or be part of
the scale ticket for each load delivered. The producer’s representative shall sign the
certification. The Contractor shall provide weigh tickets from a certified public scale to the
Engineer for each load of lime delivered to the site.”
E. Section 2202.3: The following shall be added to this section:
“E. Cement shall be Type 1 of a standard brand of Portland cement and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation: C 150‐07.
F. Lime kiln dust (LKD) shall be a by-product of the production of quicklime and shall meet
the requirements of the table below unless found by laboratory testing to be suitable for the
application and approved by the City Engineer.”

LIME KILN DUST MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PARAMETER TEST METHOD VALUE

Total calcium and ASTM C25 60% min.


magnesium oxides
(nonvolatile basis)

Available calcium ASTM C25 30% min.


hydroxide (rapid
sugar test, plus total
MgO content
calculated to be
equivalent Ca(OH)2

As-received loss on ASTM C25 40% max.


ignition (carbon
dioxide plus
moisture, combined
and free)

Free moisture (as- ASTM C25 4% max.


received basis)

SO3 ASTM C25 10% max.

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 3


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

F. Section 2202.4: The following shall be added to this section:


“Portland cement shall be applied at a rate determined by laboratory testing using the
materials from the site and the specific Portland cement to be supplied unless otherwise
designated by the Contract Documents. Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
and is subsidiary to other items. The minimum application rate shall be 5% (by volume of the
soil) unless testing indicates otherwise.
Lime kiln dust shall be applied at a rate determined by laboratory testing using the materials
from the site and the specific lime kiln dust to be supplied unless otherwise designated by
the Contract Documents. Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and is
subsidiary to other items. The minimum application rate shall be 5% (by dry weight of the
soil) unless testing indicates otherwise.”
G. Section 2202.7.D: The following shall be added to this section:
“3. For cement, the required moisture content will be established by laboratory tests with the
site soils and specific cement to be used, determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 or
AASHTO T 99. Laboratory testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and is
subsidiary to other items. Final moisture content of the mix, immediately prior to compaction
shall be +/- 3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content as determined by laboratory
testing unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
4. For lime kiln dust, the required moisture content will be established by laboratory tests with
the site soils and specific lime kiln dust to be used, determined in accordance with ASTM D
698 or AASHTO T 99. Laboratory testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and is
subsidiary to other items. Final moisture content of the mix, immediately prior to compaction
shall be +/- 3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content as determined by laboratory
testing unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.”
H. Section 2202.7.E: The following shall be added to this section:
“3. On projects having more than 20,000 square yards of manipulation, apply cement using
a controlled application system. This system may be pressurized or mechanical in nature,
utilizing vane or augers feeding cement or fly ash through a funnel or hood at a controlled
rate.
On projects having less than 20,000 square yards of manipulation, and in irregular areas,
submit a plan to the Engineer for approval that includes equipment and procedures that
address subgrade preparation and application process to spread the cement or fly ash at the
specified rate.
On projects having more than 20,000 square yards of manipulation, and consisting of multi-
phased construction, contact the District Office for approval to waive the use of the controlled
application system. Consideration will be based on the Contractors proposed alternate
method of applying the cement, the square yards of manipulation in each phase, and the size
of individual areas within each phase.
Do not apply the cement when conditions are such that the material is lost due to the wind.
Do not use cement or fly ash that was not properly handled and not stored in weatherproof
containers.

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 4


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

The Engineer will check the application rate of cement by having the Contractor blade a flat
area in the path of the cement or fly ash application, place a planar surface with a minimum
surface area of 1 square foot (e.g. a straight-sided pan) and of sufficient height to contain the
admixture on the prepared area and allow the train to pass over the surface. Weigh the test
surface before and after the cement or fly ash application and calculate the application rate.
Other methods to check the application rate may be used.

4. Lime Kiln Dust: Immediately prior to the application of the lime kiln dust, the areas shall
be scarified to allow for uniform distribution. The use of scarification equipment with positive
depth control is required and should be performed to a depth between four inches (4”) and
one inch (1”) less than the specified depth of treatment.

The lime kiln dust shall be spread uniformly over the top of the subgrade – the use of a
controlled application system approved by the Engineer is preferred but the Contractor may
submit an alternate method of spreading for approval that provides uniform distribution at
the specified rate of application. The amount of lime kiln dust spread shall be the amount
required for mixing to the specified depth which will result in the percentage determined by
laboratory testing as described in section 2202.4 Composition.

Dust control measures shall be employed to minimize fugitive dust. Lime kiln dust slurry is
to be applied with equipment that can regulate the amount passing through the nozzles and
the speed of travel to place the specified amount on the soil with a uniform lime distribution.
The concentration of the lime kiln dust slurry should allow for the application of the correct
quantity of lime kiln dust without adding an undue amount of excess moisture. The
Contractor is responsible for testing the concentration of the lime kiln dust suspension a
minimum of once per day or once per batch, whichever is greater.

No equipment, except that used in spreading the mixture, will be allowed to pass over the
freshly spread lime kiln dust or slurry until it is mixed with the soil.

I. Section 2202.7.F: The following shall be added to this section:

“3. Cement: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, either method a or b below may be used
at the option of the Contractor.

a. Multiple‐Pass Traveling Mixing Plant

After the cement has been applied it shall be dry‐mixed with the soil. Mixing shall
continue until the cement has been sufficiently blended with the soil to prevent the
formation of cement balls when water is applied. Any mixture of soil and cement that
has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30
minutes.

Immediately after the dry mixing of soil and cement is complete, water as necessary
shall be uniformly applied and incorporated into the mixture. Pressurized equipment
and supply provided shall be adequate to insure continuous application of the required
amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of application of the
cement. Proper care shall be exercised to insure proper moisture distribution at all

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 5


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

times. After the last increment of water has been added, mixing shall continue until a
thorough and uniform mix has been obtained.

b. Single‐Pass Traveling Mixing Plant

After the cement has been applied it shall be sufficiently dry‐mixed with the soil to
prevent the formation of cement balls when water is applied. Un‐pulverized soil lumps
in the soil cement mixture immediately behind the mixer that are dry will not be allowed.
Should this condition prevail, the Contractor shall "pre‐ wet" the raw soil as necessary
to correct this condition.

This mixer shall be provided with means for visibly and accurately gauging the water
application. The water shall be applied uniformly through a pressure spray bar.

After cement is spread, mixing operations shall proceed as follows:

i. The mixer shall in one continuous operation thoroughly moist‐mix the soil,
cement and water, spread the completed soil cement mixture evenly over the
machine processed width of the subgrade and leave it in a loose condition ready
for immediate compaction.

ii. The soil and cement mixture shall not remain undisturbed, after mixing and
before compacting, for more than 30 minutes.

Do not perform treated subgrade operations when the ambient air temperature is below
40°F, or the soil is frozen.

4. Lime kiln dust mixtures shall be allowed to “mellow” for a period of not less than 4 hours
in an uncompacted state during which the moisture content of the mixture shall be
maintained above the moisture content determined in accordance with AASHTO T 99 or
ASTM D968.

After the required mellowing period and prior to initial compaction, the lime kiln dust
mixture shall be re-mixed. Mixing operations shall be performed in such a manner as to
produce a uniform mixture of lime kiln dust, water, and material being treated, free of
streaks and pockets of lime kiln dust. The entire operation of lime kiln dust spreading,
water application and mixing shall result in a uniform pulverized material for the full design
depth and width.

Longitudinal joints between successive passes shall overlap a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm) and transverse joints shall overlap a minimum of 2 feet (0.60 m).

To ensure a uniformly treated section, any material/soil around manholes, utility risers,
valves and adjacent to curbs/gutters or in corners, shall have that material/soil pulled out
to the depth of treatment and placed where it is accessible for mixing. After mixing, that
material shall be replaced and compacted.

J. Section 2202.7.G: The following shall be added to this section:

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 6


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

“3. Cement: The material shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the Standard
Maximum Density ASTM D698 and as shown on the plans. At the start of compaction, the
percentage of moisture in the mixture and in un‐pulverized soil lumps, based on oven‐dry
weights, shall not be below or more than two percentage points above the specified
optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil
cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. When the
uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content
exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be
reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor.

Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full
depth. The loose mixture then shall be uniformly compacted to the specified density within
2 hours after the application of cement.

After the soil and cement mixture is compacted, water shall be uniformly applied as
needed and thoroughly mixed in with a spiketooth harrow or equal. The surface shall then
be reshaped to the required lines, grades and cross section and then lightly scarified to
loosen any imprint left by the compacting or shaping equipment.
The resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and "clipped",
"skinned", or "tight bladed" by a power grader to a depth of approximately 1/4 inch,
removing all loosened soil and cement from the section. The surface shall then be
thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as
needed during rolling. If plus No. 4 aggregate is present in the mixture, one complete
coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the
"clipping" operation. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be
varied from this procedure provided a dense, uniform surface, free of surface compaction
planes, is produced. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained
within three (3) percent of its specified optimum during all finishing operations. Surface
compaction and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce, a smooth, closely
knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose material conforming to the crown, grade and
line shown on the plans in a timeframe no longer than 2 hours from the initial application
of cement.

A test for both density and moisture content of the soil-fly ash mixture shall be taken for
each 750 square yards of material placed with a minimum of one test per day of
production.

The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM
D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 is utilized for testing purposes, the nuclear gauge shall be
calibrated within the last year. Calibration and operation of the gauge shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer. The operator of the nuclear gauge
must show evidence of training and experience in the use of the instrument. The gauge
shall be standardized daily in accordance with ASTM D 6938, paragraph 8.

Final acceptance of the compaction is dependent upon passing visual roll testing. This will
be observed and approved by the Engineer. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots
which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or
Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 7
Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

removing material as required and remixing and re-compacting with additional fly ash if
beyond the 2 hour limit. The surface of the course shall be maintained in a smooth
condition, free from undulations and ruts, until other work is placed thereon or the work is
accepted.

Should the material, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density and
finish before the work is accepted, it shall be reprocessed, recompacted and refinished at
the sole expense of the Contractor. Reprocessing shall follow the same pattern as the
initial stabilization including the addition of cement.

4. Initial compaction shall be with a padfoot compactor. At the start of compaction the
moisture content shall be within three (3) percent of the specified optimum moisture
content in accordance with AASHTO T 99 or ASTM D698. The mixed material shall be
uniformly compacted in one layer to a minimum of 95 percent. A test for both density and
moisture content of the soil-fly ash mixture shall be taken for each 750 square yards of
material placed with a minimum of one test per day of production.

The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM
D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 is utilized for testing purposes, the nuclear gauge shall be
calibrated within the last year. Calibration and operation of the gauge shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer. The operator of the nuclear gauge
must show evidence of training and experience in the use of the instrument. The gauge
shall be standardized daily in accordance with ASTM D 6938, paragraph 8.

Final acceptance of the compaction is dependent upon passing visual roll testing. This will
be observed and approved by the Engineer. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots
which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or
removing material as required and remixing and re-compacting with additional fly ash if
beyond the 2 hour limit. The surface of the course shall be maintained in a smooth
condition, free from undulations and ruts, until other work is placed thereon or the work is
accepted.

Should the material, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density and
finish before the work is accepted, it shall be reprocessed, recompacted and refinished at
the sole expense of the Contractor. Reprocessing shall follow the same pattern as the
initial stabilization including the addition of fly ash.

K. Section 2202.7.H: The following shall be added to this section:


“3. Cement: After each layer or course of the cement treated subgrade has been compacted,
it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical sections.
The finished surface of the final layer shall not vary more than 3/8 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to the pavement centerline. Any
variations in excess of this tolerance shall be corrected by the Contractor, at his/her own
expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 8


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

After the cement treated course has been finished as specified herein, the surface shall be
protected against rapid drying by one of the following methods for a period of not less than
three days or until the pavement section is placed.
a. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by sprinkling with water.
b. Apply an asphalt prime coat emulsion curing seal approved by the Engineer at a rate
of 0.15 gallons per square yard.
c. Other options for maintaining moisture may be submitted in writing for approval by the
Engineer.
Restrict construction traffic from operating on the treated subgrade until it can withstand the
loads without damage or deformation.
4. Lime Kiln Dust: After each layer or course of the lime kiln dust treated subgrade has been
compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical
sections. The finished surface of the final layer shall not vary more than 3/8 inch when tested
with a 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to the pavement
centerline. Any variations in excess of this tolerance shall be corrected by the Contractor, at
his/her own expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. After the lime treated course
has been finished as specified herein, the surface shall be cured by one of the following
methods for a period of not less than three days and maintained until placement of the
subsequent course (base or pavement) or up to seven days, whichever occurs first:
a. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by sprinkling with water.
b. Apply an asphalt prime coat emulsion curing seal approved by the Engineer at a rate
of 0.15 gallons per square yard.
c. Other options for a curing seal may be submitted in writing for approval by the
Engineer.
Restrict all construction traffic (except watering equipment) from operating on the treated
subgrade during the curing period. Restriction may be lifted after three days if treated
subgrade has gained sufficient strength to withstand the loads without damage or
deformation.
Protect the subgrade from freezing throughout the curing period.
L. Section 2202.7: The following shall be added to this section:
“J. Roll Testing
Roll testing is required before acceptable of finished subgrade. All lanes shall be roll tested
in their entire length. The subgrade will not be acceptable if rutting, pumping, or deformation
of the subgrade results from the roll test. This testing will be done by the contractor, and will
be in addition to the applicable moisture and density testing.
Equipment for roll testing shall be a tandem dump truck (one front and two rear axles) carrying
a minimum load of twenty (20) tons.
The truck shall proceed slowly along each traffic lane, allowing the Engineer to walk alongside
and observe the results. Areas failing the roll test will be reworked by incorporating additional
fly ash into the subgrade and remixing. The failed areas shall be retested prior to approval of
the subgrade for paving.
Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 9
Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

K. Unsuitable Materials
When unstable or unsuitable materials are encountered, they shall be removed to the depth
required to reach stable material or as directed by the Engineer. The over-excavated area
shall be backfilled with suitable material as defined in Section 4110 – Earthwork, or KDOT
AB-3 aggregate material may be used if allowed by the Engineer. Backfilled subgrade shall
be compacted in accordance with the requirements of this Section.”
Section 2202.7.I: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“I. Protection and Maintenance
The newly finished subgrade shall be repaired from action of the elements or others. Any
action (e.g. settlement or erosion) that damages the subgrade or any subgrade that has
become unacceptable prior to placing the pavement thereon, shall be repaired and the
specific lines, grades, cross-section, tolerance, density, and moisture content range
reestablished.
The Contractor shall protect all pavements, curbs, sidewalks, and recreational trails from
subgrade operation with an earth cushion, timber planking, or both where tractors, graders,
rollers, or other equipment are required to pass, or turn around. All resulting damage shall be
repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
The contractor shall maintain, at his/her own expense, the entire treated subgrade in good
condition from the start of work until all the work has been completed, cured, and the
pavement is placed.”
M. Section 2202.8.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Lime
Field measured per square yard.”
N. Section 2202.8.B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“B. Fly Ash
Field measured per square yard.”
O. Section 2202.8.C: This section shall be deleted.
P. Section 2202.8: The following shall be added to this section:
“F. Cement:
Field measured per square yard.
G. Lime Kiln Dust:
Field measured per square yard.”
Q. Section 2202.9.A: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“A. Payment for lime shall be made at the Contract unit price. Materials, equipment, labor,
and other appurtenant work shall be considered subsidiary to the unit price of the lime.
R. Section 2202.9.B: This section shall be deleted and replaced with the following:
“B. Payment for fly ash shall be made at the Contract unit price. Materials, equipment, labor,
and other appurtenant work shall be considered subsidiary to the unit price of the fly ash.”
S. Section 2202.9: The following shall be added to this section:

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 10


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

“E. Payment for cement shall be made at the Contract unit price. Materials, equipment,
labor, and other appurtenant work shall be considered subsidiary to the unit price of
cement.

F. Payment for Cement shall be made at the Contract unit price. Materials, equipment,
labor, and other appurtenant work shall be considered subsidiary to the unit price of Lime
Kiln Dust.”

1.04 SUBGRADE FOR RESIDENTIAL DRIVE APPROACH, SIDEWALK, AND TRAIL CONSTRUCTION
A. Granular Base Course: A four (4) inch granular base course of KDOT AB-3 is required
for sidewalk and recreational trail construction. The base course shall be compacted to
ninety-five percent (95%) of standard density as determined by ASTM D698. Moisture
content shall be within three percent (3%) of the optimum moisture content at time of
compaction. Exceptions to the requirement for the use of KDOT AB-3 are outlined in
Section 4225 – Sidewalks.
B. Subgrade: The subgrade shall be KDOT Type B compaction with a moisture range of
KDOT MR-90 unless more stringent compaction is required by the Engineer.

1.05 SUBGRADE FOR COMMERCIAL DRIVE APPROACH AND CURB & GUTTER CONSTRUCTION
The subgrade for commercial drive approaches and curb shall be compacted to the same
density and moisture range as required for the subgrade of the adjacent pavement.

END OF SECTION

Division 4200 Streets 4235 - 11


Section 4235 Subgrade Stabilization 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4300 STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 4305 – STORM SEWER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the construction of storm sewers for the collection and transport of
stormwater runoff.

1.02 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. KC-APWA:
1. Section 2600 Storm Sewers
B. KDOT Standard Specifications:
1. Division 1900 Culvert, Sewer, and Underdrain Pipe
C. AASHTO:
1. M 294 – Standard Specification for Corrugated PE pipe
D. ASTM:
1. A 1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
2. C 76 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and
Sewer Pipe
3. C 506 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and
Sewer Pipe
4. C 507 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain
and Sewer Pipe
5. C 1619 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals for Joining Concrete Structures
6. C 1628 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe,
Using Rubber Gaskets
7. D 2321 – Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications
8. D 3212 – Standard Specification for Joints and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
9. D 3350 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fitting Materials
10. F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 1


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

11. F 2306 – Standard Specification for 12 to 60 inch Annular Corrugated Profile-Wall


Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm Sewer and Subsurface
Drainage Applications
12. F 2736 – Standard Specification for 6 to 30 in. Polypropylene Corrugated Single Wall
Pipe and Double Wall Pipe
13. F 2764 – Standard Specification for 30 to 60 in. Polypropylene Triple Wall Pipe and
Fittings for Non-Pressure Sanitary Sewer Applications

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Public Storm System: The City of Shawnee requires RCP (reinforced concrete pipe) or
Polypropylene (PP) to be used for all public storm systems. RCP shall be used for all
public storm systems within rights-of-way. This includes storm pipe installed under
pavement or generally parallel to pavement.
PP may be used to connect a public storm system located outside of the rights-of-way to a
storm system within the rights-of-way.
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) shall not be used on public storm systems.
Other pipe materials may only be used with the approval of the City Engineer.
B. Private Storm System: RCP, HDPE, and PP may be used on private storm systems at
the discretion of the Owner; however, only RCP or PP shall be used for the connection
between the private storm system and the public drainage structure, if the connection is
within the rights-of-way.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. RCP shall not be delivered to the work site until concrete control cylinders representing
such pipe have attained a compressive strength of at least eighty percent (80%) of the
specified 28-day strength. Upon request by the Engineer, Contractor shall supply
certification of strength test.
B. HDPE and PP products shall have the manufacturer’s certification submitted to the
Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP)


A. RCP: RCP shall be Class III with a wall thickness not less than Wall B, unless otherwise
specified within the Construction Documents. All pipes shall conform to the following ASTM
standards:
1. Round: ASTM C 76
2. Elliptical: ASTM C 507
3. Arch: ASTM C 506
B. Lift Holes: Concrete pipe shall not have lift holes for installation.
C. Markings: Pipes and fittings shall be permanently marked as follows:
1. Pipe class and nominal size
2. Date of manufacture

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 2


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3. Manufacturer’s name and/or trademark


4. Amount of miter and point of maximum miter (if applicable)
D. Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be full-circle type and shall meet the standards of
ASTM A1064. Elliptical or part-circle reinforcement shall not be used.
E. Joints: Rubber gasket joints conforming to ASTM C 1628 shall be used for all round pipe.
Mastic joints conforming to ASTM C 1619 shall be used for all other pipe shapes.
F. Sections: Each section of pipe shall not be less than eight (8) feet long for pipe diameters
forty-eight (48) inches or less and shall not be less than six (6) feet long for pipe diameters
larger than forty-eight (48) inches.

2.02 POLYPROPYLENE (PP)


A. Pipe: Polypropylene compound shall be impact modified copolymer meeting the following
ASTM requirements:
1. 12- to 30-inch polypropylene pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2736. Pipe
shall be smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
2. 30- to 60-inch polypropylene pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2764. Pipe
shall be smooth interior and exterior with annular inner corrugations.
B. Joints: Joints shall be a gasketed integral bell and spigot connection, meeting the
requirements of ASTM F2736 or ASTM F2764. Joints shall be watertight according to the
requirements of ASTM D3212. Spigot shall have two gaskets meeting the requirements of
ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a
removable, protective wrap to ensure the gaskets are free from debris.
A joint lubricant shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly.
C. Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2736 or ASTM F2764. Bell and spigot
connections shall utilize a spun-on, welded or integral bell and spigot with gaskets meetings
ASTM F477. Fitting joints shall meet the watertight joint performance requirements of
ASTM D3212. Only fittings supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe shall
be used.
D. Certification: Pipe manufacturer shall be certified through the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)
third party certification program.
E. Markings: Pipes and fittings shall be permanently marked as follows:
1. Nominal size
2. Date of manufacture
3. Manufacturer’s name and/or trademark
4. Specification designation

2.03 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE)


A. Pipe: HDPE pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306 and AASHTO M294. Pipe
shall be virgin PE compounds, which conform to the requirements of cell class 435400C in
the latest edition of ASTM D3350.
B. Joints: Joints shall consist of integral bell and spigot with rubber gaskets that meet ASTM
F477. The bell shall span over three (3) spigot corrugations.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 3


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

C. Water-Tight Joints: Water tight joints shall meet a 10.8 psi laboratory test in accordance
with ASTM D3212.
D. Fittings: Fittings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306.
Fittings may be either molded or fabricated. Only fittings supplied or recommended by the
manufacturer of the pipe shall be used.
E. Certification: Pipe manufacturer shall be certified through the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)
third party certification program.
F. Markings: Pipes and fittings shall be permanently marked as follows:
1. Nominal size
2. Date of manufacture
3. Manufacturer’s name and/or trademark
4. Specification designation

2.04 UNDERDRAIN
Corrugated polyethylene tubing and drainable aggregates for underdrains shall conform to the
Standard Details and KDOT Division 1900.

2.05 PIPE REPAIR AND LINING


Pipe that requires repair shall be replaced with the same material as existing. The exception
being that CMP pipe shall be replaced with RCP or PP. Pipe lining materials may be allowed as
an alternative when recommended by the Engineer and approved by the City Engineer.
Installation of pipe lining materials shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RCP
A. Cleaning: The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter
before being installed. All joint surfaces shall be kept clean until the jointing is completed.
1. Debris: All debris, tools, or foreign materials shall be removed from the pipe.
2. Stop Work: When construction has temporarily stopped for the day, the open end of
the pipe section shall be sufficiently closed with an end board to prevent water, earth or
other substance from entering the pipe.
B. Handling: All pipe, fittings, end sections, and accessories shall be unloaded, stockpiled,
hauled, distributed, and otherwise handled in a manner which will prevent damage.
Damaged pipe shall be marked as such and shall not be used by the Contractor.
C. Trenching: Refer to Section 4110 - Grading and Site Preparation for City standard
requirements.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 4


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

D. Joints:
1. Rubber Gasket: Rubber gasket joints shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. The position and conditions of the rubber gasket
shall be checked with a feeler gauge after the piping unit is installed
2. Mastic: Mastic joints shall be constructed to attain a watertight joint. Sufficient mastic
shall be applied so as to completely fill any space between the spigot end of one pipe
and the bell end of the adjoining pipe. In laying pipe, the maximum mastic joint
opening shall not exceed the manufacturers’ recommendations, or the following table,
whichever is less.
Pipe Size
(Round Equivalent) Maximum Joint Opening

15” to 24” 1/4”


27” to 84” 1/2”
90” and larger 3/4”
The above maximum openings are for the purpose of compensating for minor
irregularities in the manufacture of the pipe joints. The pipe is to be laid to line and
grade so that the sections are pushed completely home at least at one point around
the circumference of the joint, without spalling the concrete. Permissible joint openings
may exist at other points around the circumference of the pipe.
Mastic shall only be applied to pipe that is to be installed the same day. If the pipe is
not installed the same day the mastic is applied, the mastic shall be removed and
replaced with a fresh mastic coating prior to installation.
E. Installation:
1. Protection: Pipe shall be protected during installation against shock and free fall, and
shall be installed without cracking, chipping, breaking, bending, or damage to coating
materials. Damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.
2. Pipe Laying: Pipe laying shall proceed from the downstream end of the project with
bell ends facing upstream. All pipe shall be laid with ends abutting and true to line and
grade as shown within the Construction Documents.
3. Grade Control: Alignment and grade shall be uniform between structures, and an
accurate/reliable system of grade control shall be used for maintaining alignment.
F. Bedding: Pipe installation and bedding shall be in strict conformance with City Standard
Details. Pipe shall be placed so that the barrel and length of pipe have full support of the
bedding material.
G. Backfill: Backfilling of trench shall be in strict conformance with Section 4125 – Excavation
Trenching, and Backfilling.

3.02 POLYPROPYLENE
A. Handling: All pipe, pipe fittings, and accessories shall be unloaded, stockpiled, hauled,
distributed, and otherwise handled in a manner which will prevent damage.
B. Cleaning: The interior surfaces of all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter
before being lowered in the trenches and shall be kept clean during the laying operations.
1. Debris: All debris, tools, or foreign materials shall be removed from the pipe.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 5


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2. Stop Work: When construction has temporarily stopped for the day, the open end of
the pipe section shall be sufficiently closed with an end board to prevent water, earth or
other substance from entering the pipe.
C. Trenching: Refer to Section 4110 - Grading and Site Preparation for City standard
requirements.
D. Installation: PP pipe shall be installed per ASTM D2321, the manufacturer’s specification,
and in accordance with the Standard Details. In case of a discrepancy between the
requirements, the more restrictive shall govern.
1. Grade Control: Alignment and grade shall be uniform between structures, and a
reliable system of grade control shall be used for maintaining alignment.
2. PP pipe shall be laid with the separate sections jointed firmly together, with outside
laps of the circumferential joints pointing upstream, and the center line of the invert
coinciding with the specified alignment of the pipe.
3. The minimum cover over PP pipes larger than twenty-four (24) inches in diameter shall
be two (2) feet.
4. Joints shall be seated per manufacturer’s recommendation to attain a watertight joint.
E. Deflection: If required by the City Engineer, the Contractor is responsible for verifying the
deflection of the pipe. The maximum pipe deflection allowed is five (5) percent. Time of
measurement shall be not less than thirty (30) days or more than sixty (60) days following
installation. Deflections in excess of five percent (5%) may require the pipe to be removed
and new pipe installed.
F. Backfill: Backfilling a trench shall be in strict conformance with Section 4110 - Grading
and Site Preparation.

3.03 HDPE
A. Handling: All pipe, pipe fittings, and accessories shall be unloaded, stockpiled, hauled,
distributed, and otherwise handled in a manner which will prevent damage.
B. Cleaning: The interior surfaces of all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter
before being lowered in the trenches and shall be kept clean during the laying operations.
C. Trenching: Refer to Section 4110 - Grading and Site Preparation for City standard
requirements.
D. Installation: HDPE pipe shall be installed per ASTM D2321 and the manufacturer’s
specification. In case of a discrepancy between the two requirements, the more restrictive
shall govern.
1. Grade Control: Alignment and grade shall be uniform between structures, and a
reliable system of grade control shall be used for maintaining alignment.
2. HDPE pipe shall be laid with the separate sections jointed firmly together, with outside
laps of the circumferential joints pointing upstream, and the center line of the invert
coinciding with the specified alignment of the pipe.
3. The minimum cover over HDPE pipes larger than twenty-four (24) inches in diameter
shall be two (2) feet.
4. Joints shall be seated per manufacturer’s recommendation to attain a watertight joint.
E. Deflection: If required by the City Engineer, the Contractor is responsible for verifying the
deflection of the pipe. The maximum pipe deflection allowed is five percent (5%). Time of
Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 6
Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

measurement shall be not less than thirty (30) days or more than sixty (60) days following
installation. Deflections in excess of five percent (5%) may require the pipe to be removed
and new pipe installed.
F. Backfill: Backfilling a trench shall be in strict conformance with Section 4110 - Grading
and Site Preparation.

3.04 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT


Concrete encasements shall be in strict conformance with the Standard Details.

3.05 ALIGNMENT TESTING


To verify alignment and workmanship, installed pipe shall be televised by the City at any time
during the maintenance period. Televised pipe shall be inspected for a smooth, structurally
sound, straight main. Unacceptable defects include, but are not limited to, displacement at
joints, intrusion of foreign material, cracked and distressed pipe, and exposed reinforcing steel.
Pipe not passing alignment tests shall be repaired and/or replaced and retested at the
Contractor’s expense.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 PIPE
A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Linear foot. The pipe shall be measured to the inside face of the structure and to
pipe pay length at end sections per Standard Details.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. All fittings, joints, gaskets,
trenching, excavating, and other appurtenant work shall be considered subsidiary to the unit
price of pipe.

4.02 END SECTIONS


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Per each.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price.

4.03 CONCRETE PIPE ENCASEMENT


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Linear foot of pipe encased.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price.

END OF SECTION

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4305 - 7


Section 4305 Storm Sewer Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4300 STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 4310 – STORM STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the construction of storm inlets, manholes, and junction boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for the structures shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review and approval prior to ordering any materials from the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete used in the construction of precast sections of the storm structures
shall be a KCMMB4k mix design. Concrete used for any portion of the structure that is
cast-in-place shall be a KCMMB5k mix design.
B. Castings: Shall meet the requirements of the Standard Details.
C. Steps: Shall meet the requirements of the Standard Details.
D. Reinforcing Steel: Shall meet the requirements of the Standard Details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation: Excavation for the storm structures shall be in accordance with Section 4110
– Grading and Site Preparation.
B. Construction: Construction of the storm structures shall be in accordance with the
Standard Details. Lift holes shall be sealed with a non-shrink, non-metallic grout with a
minimum 28-day compressive strength of five thousand (5,000) psi or a similar material
approved by the City Engineer.
C. Joints: Joints shall be in accordance with Section 4305 – Storm Sewer.
D. Backfill: Backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 4110 – Grading and Site
Preparation.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4310 - 1


Section 4310 Storm Structures 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

E. Concrete: The placement of concrete for the throat, curb transitions, top of structures,
inverts, collars and other applicant concrete work shall be performed in accordance with
Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 STORM STRUCTURES


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Per each.
C. Payment: Inlets, manholes, and junction boxes shall be paid for at the contract unit price.
Due to various sizes of the same type of structure needed one project, multiple unit prices
might be listed for the same type of structure. Installation, backfill, and connection of the
storm system to the structures shall be subsidiary to the structure.

END OF SECTION

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4310 - 2


Section 4310 Storm Structures 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4300 STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 4315 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers furnishing, transporting, and installing of precast reinforced concrete box
culverts.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE
All reinforced concrete box culverts shown on the plans shall be precast, unless specified
otherwise within the Construction Documents.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)
B. ASTM
1. C 877 – Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe,
Manholes, and Precast Box Sections
2. C 1433 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box
Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication, shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review and approval. The submittal shall include a narrative detailing all phases of
construction including layout, joint details, lifting devises, casting methods, and if required,
the construction, placement, and details of any cast-in-place section. Also, the proposed
transportation methods shall be noted on the shop drawings.
Shop drawings shall include any required modifications including but not limited, wing walls,
toe walls, hub guards, and openings for proposed connections.
B. Testing: All testing shall conform to ASTM C 1433.
C. Certification: Contractor shall provide certification from the manufacturer that the precast
reinforced concrete box culvert has passed all required testing. Shop drawings and precast
box culvert designs shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of
Kansas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert: Materials used in the manufacture of the
precast reinforced concrete box sections shall comply with ASTM C 1433.
1. Concrete shall be a KCMMB5k mix.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4315 - 1


Section 4315 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2. The minimum length of a precast section shall be four (4) feet.


B. Markings: Box sections shall be permanently marked as follows:
1. Top of box.
2. Date of manufacture.
3. Manufacturer’s name and/or trademark.
4. Weight of box section in tons.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Delivery: Precast reinforced concrete box sections shall not be delivered to the site until
the concrete control cylinders for the sections have attained a compressive strength of at
least eighty percent (80%) of the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength.
B. Inspection: Box sections shall be inspected by the Engineer when delivered to the site.
Individual box sections shall be rejected because of any of the following:
1. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall.
2. Honeycombed or spalled areas.
3. Damaged ends, where such damage could prevent making a satisfactory joint.
C. Handling: Box sections shall be protected during installation against shock and free fall,
and shall be installed without cracking, chipping, breaking, bending, or damage to coating
materials. Damaged box sections or fittings shall be replaced with new components at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Cleaning: The interior of all box sections and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation and shall be kept clean until the Work has been accepted. All joint contact
surfaces shall be kept clean until the joint is completed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation: Excavation for the all precast reinforced concrete box sections shall be in
accordance with Section 4125 – Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling.
B. Placement: Box sections shall be installed on a minimum of six (6) inches of compacted
clean granular fill. Sections shall not be laid in water or in unsuitable trench conditions.
Concrete seal course may be allowed at the discretion of the Engineer.
Box sections shall be placed starting at the downstream end of the project with groove ends
facing upstream. All box sections shall be laid with ends abutting and true to line and grade
as shown within the Construction Documents. When work has stopped for the day, the
open end of the box shall be sufficiently closed with an end board to keep soil or other
substance from entering the box. The end board shall have several small holes near the
center to permit water to enter the box and prevent floatation in the event of flooding of the
trench.
Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the box during installation. All debris,
tools, or other foreign materials shall be removed from the box culvert.
C. Alignment: Alignment and grade shall be uniform between box sections, and an
accurate/reliable system of grade control shall be used for maintaining alignment.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4315 - 2


Section 4315 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

D. Jointing: Mastic joints shall be constructed to attain a watertight seal. Sufficient mastic
shall be applied so as to completely fill any space between the tongue end of one section
and the groove end of the adjoining section. The maximum mastic joint opening shall not
exceed the manufacturers’ recommendations, or 3/4-inch, whichever is less.
The above maximum openings are for the purpose of compensating for minor irregularities
in the manufacture of the box sections. The sections are to be laid to line and grade so that
the sections are pushed completely home at least at one point around the circumference of
the joint, without spalling the concrete. Permissible joint openings may exist at other points
around the circumference of the section.
Mastic shall only be applied to sections that are to be installed the same day. If the section
is not installed the same day the mastic is applied, the mastic shall be removed and
replaced with a fresh mastic coating prior to installation.
E. Lift Holes: Lift holes shall be sealed with a non-shrink, non-metallic grout with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of five thousand (5,000) psi or a similar material approved by
the City Engineer.
F. Sealer Bands: All joints shall be wrapped in an external sealing band meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 877 and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
G. Multiple Barrels: The space between parallel segments in reinforced concrete box
culverts that have multiple barrels shall be filled with flowable fill or as indicated within the
Construction Documents. The minimum space between parallel barrels shall be not be less
than four (4) inches.
H. Backfill: Backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 4125 – Excavation, Trenching,
and Backfilling.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Linear Feet. The box culvert shall be measured per in-place installed length.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Installation, backfill, jointing
materials and other appurtenant work shall be subsidiary to the box culvert.

4.02 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Cubic Yard.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Installation, materials and
other appurtenant work shall be subsidiary to the foundation stabilization.

END OF SECTION

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4315 - 3


Section 4315 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4300 STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 4320 – CHANNEL LINING

- GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the construction of channel lining. More specifically the construction of
stone riprap and concrete channel lining.

1.02 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB): (www.kcmmb.org)
B. ASTM:
1. C88/C88M – Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

- PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE CHANNEL LINING


Concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified in the Standard Details and Section 4405 –
Cast in Place Concrete. Concrete used in the construction of reinforced concrete channel lining
shall be a KCMMB4k mix design.

2.02 STONE RIPRAP


Stone for riprap shall consist of quarried rock and shall be sound, durable, and angular in
shape. No more than ten percent (10%) shall have an elongation greater than 3:1. Additionally,
no stone shall have an elongation great than 4:1. Material shall be free from cracks, seams, or
other defects.
Not more than ten percent (10%) of the stone shall exhibit slitting, crumbling, or spalling when
subject to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM
C88/C88M.
Shale and stone from shale seams are not acceptable. Concrete rubble is not acceptable.

- EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE DRAINAGE CHANNEL


A. Reinforcing: The minimum amount of reinforcing placed in any section of the concrete
paving shall be 6-inch by 6-inch spacing welded wire fabric, W3 thickness. Wire fabric shall
be supplied in flat sheet form. Wire fabric shall be supported on fabricated steel bar
supports at 3-foot maximum spacing. Fabric shall not be placed by floating or using hooks
"hooking".

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4320 - 1


Section 4320 Channel Lining 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

B. Expansion Joints: Transverse expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of two


hundred fifty (250) feet, and where new construction adjoins existing liners, cold joints, or
other structures. Smooth dowel bars, 2-feet long by 5/8-inch diameter, sleeved, at 18-inch
centers, shall be carried through the expansion joints. Expansion joints shall consist of 1/2-
inch premolded, non-extruding expansion joint material.
C. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints shall be sawed or tooled to a minimum depth of
one quarter the thickness of the slab, at 10-foot maximum centers. No longitudinal joints
shall be placed at the flow line. Joints shall be filled with a joint sealer material approved by
the Engineer.
D. Weep Holes: 2-inch diameter plastic weep holes shall be placed at fifteen (15) foot centers
and backfilled with 3/4-inch clean rock, fifteen (15) inches in all directions above the flow
line. Weep holes shall be flush with the face of the concrete and the back screened.

3.02 STONE RIPRAP


A. Preparation: The area upon which the riprap is to be placed shall be excavated to the
required grades and lines and the surface shall be smoothed and compacted.
B. Fabric: Geotextile material shall be laid on the compacted surface prior to placing the
riprap.
C. Placement: Riprap shall be placed on edge with the bedding plane at right angles to the
slope. Place the stones with ends and sides abutting, as much as the size and shape of
the stones will allow. The spaces between the stones shall be filled with spalls of suitable
size and all spalls shall be rammed thoroughly in place. The entire surface shall be
rammed and compacted to obtain a tight surface. The finished riprap shall present an even
surface confirming to the lines, grades, and section shown within the Construction
Documents.
D. Grout: When grouted riprap is indicated with the Construction Documents, the space
between stones of grouted riprap shall be filled when grout consisting of one part Portland
cement and three parts of fine aggregate with sufficient water to form a plastic mix. The
grout shall be placed and broomed into voids until completely filled.
The grout shall be cured in accordance with Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 CONCRETE DRAINAGE CHANNEL


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Square yard of surface area.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Reinforcement steel, joint
material, curing compounds, and other appurtenant work is considered subsidiary to the
unit price of the channel lining.

4.02 STONE RIPRAP


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured.
B. Unit: Square yard, the riprap shall be measured along the edge of the finished surface.

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4320 - 2


Section 4320 Channel Lining 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Compaction of the subgrade,
furnishing and placement of the geotextile material, excavation, and other labor shall be
subsidiary to the unit price of Stone Riprap.

END OF SECTION

Division 4300 Storm Drainage 4320 - 3


Section 4320 Channel Lining 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4400 CONCRETE

SECTION 4405 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers cast-in-place concrete, including, joints, reinforcing steel, forms, finishing,
curing, weather limitations, ready mix plant requirements and other appurtenant work.
Additional sections shall be referenced that contain pertinent information relating to different
concrete applications, including but not limited to curbs, concrete pavement, storm drainage
structures.

1.02 REFERENCES
The latest revision of references shall govern unless a specific revision is stated.
A. KDOT Standard Specification:
1. Section 1501 – Hot Joint Sealing Compound
2. Section 1602 – Epoxy Coated Steel for Concrete Reinforcement
B. Kansas City Metro Materials Board: (www.kcmmb.org)
C. ACI:
1. 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
2. 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
3. 305 – Standard Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
4. 306 – Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
D. ASTM:
1. A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
2. A615/615M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
3. A934/A94M – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing
Bars
4. A996/996M – Standard specifications for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
concrete Reinforcement
5. C94/C94M – Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
6. C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
7. C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 1


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

8. C138/C138M - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
9. C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
10. C231/231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
11. C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
12. C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
13. D1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
14. D1752 – Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice:


1. Chapter 3 – Bar Supports

1.03 SUBMITTALS
All items listed in Part 2 of this section shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, including
cut sheets and certifications prior to use on the project.
A. Mix Designs: Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to placing any
concrete. The mix design shall provide the name of the supplier and the unique number
designated by the supplier indicating the mix design is an approved KCMMB mix. The
unique name/number on the batch ticket delivered to the jobsite must match the unique
name/number assigned or the concrete will be rejected.
B. Reinforcement Steel: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, bar lists, and bending
diagrams to the Engineer for approval prior to confirming any order for reinforcement.
C. Reinforcement Supports: Representative samples of supporting elements shall be
submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to their use in the project.
D. Large Placements: For concrete placements in excess of one hundred fifity (150) cubic
yards per project, the following is required:
1. A concrete delivery plan shall be prepared and submitted to the City Engineer detailing
the location of the concrete plant, required truck routes and distance from the plant to
the project site, and the anticipated rate of placement.
2. A representative from the concrete supplier shall be on-site at all times.

1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Expansion Joint: Expansion joints permit volume change movement of the concrete and
utilize a pre-formed, or pre-molded elastic/resilient material to allow this movement. The
material used shall be the same dimension as the concrete is thick. Refer to the Standard
Details for concrete applications that requires the use of expansion joints.
B. Contraction Joint: The contraction joint, also often referred to as a control joint or saw-cut
joint, is a joint that is formed by the Contractor with the use of a saw, hand tools, or other

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 2


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

methods. The joints are placed at increments determined by the Standard Details or
Construction Documents to control shrinkage cracking.
C. Construction Joint: The construction joint, also often referred to as a cold joint or
longitudinal joint, is a joint located between two sections of concrete. The second section of
concrete is placed against a section of concrete already in place which has hardened to the
extent that consolidation cannot be effected by vibration or re-vibration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the specifications of the Kansas City Metro Materials
Board (KCMMB), including all materials and admixtures used in the production of the
concrete. Concrete mixes used for bridge construction shall be as designated by the
Engineer.
1. A KCMMB4k mix shall be used for the construction of concrete pavement, curbs,
sidewalks, driveways, shared use paths, pre-cast storm drainage structures (excluding
the cast-in-place tops), concrete inverts, storm structure aprons, pipe collars, concrete
ditch liner, and median noses and as otherwise designated within the Construction
Documents.
2. A KCMMB5k mix shall be used for the construction of all cast-in-place reinforced box
culverts, retaining walls and headwalls, integral sidewalk retaining walls, cast-in-place
storm drainage structure tops, and as otherwise designated within the Construction
Documents.
B. Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall conform to the following:
1. Steel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, A996/A996M, Grade 60 unless otherwise noted on
the drawings or Standard Details.
2. Epoxy Bars: KDOT Section 1602.
3. Dowels: ASTM A934/934M.
4. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064/1064M, Grade 60. Wire fabric shall be supplied in
sheets, not rolls.
5. Reinforcing Steel Accessories:
(a) Plastic Protected Wire Bar Supports shall conform to Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute, Class 1 for epoxy coated, and Class 1, 2 or 3 for all other materials.
(b) Stainless Steel Protected Wire Bar Supports shall conform to Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute, Class 2 with legs made wholly from stainless steel
wire.
(c) Precast Concrete Bar Supports shall have equal or greater strength than the
surrounding concrete.
C. Expansion Joint Fillers: Expansion joint fillers shall conform to ASTM D1752 for concrete
pavement and ASTM D1751 for sidewalk, recreation trail, curb, and drive approach
applications.
D. Joint Sealing Compounds: Hot-poured joint sealing compounds shall conform to KDOT
Section 1501.

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 3


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

E. Curing Membrane: The curing membrane shall be of the liquid membrane type and shall
conform to ASTM C309. All curing membranes shall contain a white pigment except curing
membranes used for recreational trails. Curing membranes applied to recreational trails
shall be clear drying.
F. Admixtures: KCMMB Concrete shall not be supplied with any admixtures designated as
“optional” in the Mix Design Testing Data without prior approval of the City Engineer.
Additionally, admixtures shall not be added to the concrete at the job-site to increase
workability unless approved by the City Engineer.

2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Forms: All forms shall be in good condition, clean, and free from imperfections.
1. Forms shall be made of steel, unless the City Engineer allows the use of wood forms
due to an unusual shaped section or small quantity of concrete being placed.
2. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled before each use.
3. Forms shall be in good condition with not more than 1/4-inch variation in horizontal and
vertical alignment for each ten (10) feet in length.
4. Forms shall have a height equal to or greater than the thickness of the concrete to be
placed.
5. Forms shall be of such cross-section and strength, and secured to resist the pressure
of the concrete when struck off, vibrated, and finished, and the impact and vibration of
all equipment.
B. Ready Mix Batch Plants: Ready mix batch plants shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C94/C94M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notification: Contractor shall notify the City at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
the times and locations that concrete will be placed.
B. Limits: The limits of each concrete pour shall be predetermined by the Contractor and
shall be agreed upon by the Engineer. All concrete within such limits shall be placed in one
continuous operation.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete: The consistency of the concrete shall be suitable for the type placement being
performed. Aggregates shall float uniformly throughout the mass and the concrete shall
flow sluggishly when vibrated or spaded. Concrete which does not meet the slump and/or
air requirements identified in the approved mix design shall be rejected.
B. Forms: Prior to placement of the concrete pavement, all debris and foreign material shall
be removed from the inner surfaces of the forms and all forms and subgrade properly
moistened.
1. Forms shall be set true to line and grade, supported through their length and joined
neatly in such a manner that the joints are free from movement in any direction. Each
form shall not vary more than one quarter (1/4) inch in horizontal and vertical alignment
for each ten (10) feet in length.

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 4


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

2. Forms shall be cleaned and lubricated prior to each use and shall be so designed to
permit their removal without damage to the new concrete.
C. Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel of the size and type specified shall be placed in
accordance with the Standard Details. All reinforcing steel shall be tied and supported on
chairs. All required reinforcement and accessories shall be properly and firmly set into
position to prevent movement during placement of the concrete. Welded wire fabric shall
be supported on chairs. Placement of welded wire fabric in concrete with hooks or by
"hooking" shall not be permitted.
D. Subgrade Conditions: Concrete shall not be placed on frozen subgrade or in excavations
which have not been dewatered.
E. Mixing and Transport: Mixing and transport of the concrete to the job site shall conform to
requirements of ACI 304.
F. Time Constraints: Concrete shall be placed within ninety (90) minutes of mixing
operations unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer.
G. Sampling and Control Testing: A recognized testing laboratory, or other agency
satisfactory to the Engineer, shall test all concrete and concrete mixtures delivered to the
job site on a continuing basis with three copies of the certified test results provided to the
Engineer. The City is responsible for providing the testing services, unless the Construction
Documents state that the Contractor is required to provide testing.
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C39/C39M) three (3) test specimens for the first 50
cubic yards, and every 100 cubic yards thereafter per day or as directed for each class
of structural concrete placed. One cylinder to be tested at 7 days and the other two at
28 days. Test specimens to be prepared to ASTM C31/C31M.
2. Slump (ASTM C143/143M) once per compressive strength test, or as directed during
placement to control changes made to mix proportions.
3. Air Entrainment (ASTM C231/231M) once per compressive strength test, or as directed
to control changes made to mix proportions.
4. Yield Test (ASTM C138/C138M) once per compressive strength test, or as directed
during placement to control changes made to mix proportions.
H. Placement: Concrete shall be deposited over the entire width of the prepared subgrade
between the forms in such a manner to prevent segregation and to require as little handling
as possible. Concrete shall be placed to the required depth and width in successive
batches and in a continuous operation without the use of intermediate forms or bulkheads.
While being placed, the concrete shall be vibrated and compacted with suitable tools so
that the formation of voids or honeycomb pockets is prevented. For installation of concrete
using a paving machine, refer to Section 4210 of the SDCM.
When it is necessary to drop concrete a distance of more than three (3) feet, troughs, pipes,
or chutes shall be used as aides in placing concrete and shall be arranged and used in
such a manner that the material components of the concrete do not become separated.
Where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or short
lengths that reverse the direction of movement. All chutes, troughs, and pipes and
reinforcing steel shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete. At no
time shall concrete drop freely for a distance of more than three (3) feet.
The concrete shall be well vibrated and tamped against the forms and along all joints. For
concrete pavement, care shall be taken in the distribution of the concrete to deposit a
sufficient volume along the outside form lines so that the curb section can be consolidated

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 5


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

and finished simultaneously with the slab. Vibratory tools shall not be used to move
concrete horizontally.
No concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures until they have been
brought to the required grade, alignment, and cross slope.
Concrete shall not be allowed to extrude below the forms.
I. Finishing: For finishing techniques, refer to the individual sections as they apply.
J. Curing: As soon as practical after the concrete is finished, it shall be cured with a liquid
curing membrane, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1. The curing compound shall be applied after final finishing operations have been
completed, and immediately after the free water has left the surface of the concrete.
2. A nozzle producing a uniform fan pattern shall be used on all spray equipment when
applying the liquid curing membrane.
3. Two (2) smooth coats shall be applied to ensure complete coverage and effective
protection, with each coat applied at an application rate not less than three hundred
(300) square feet per gallon.
4. If the forms are removed from finished concrete pavement within a period of seventy-
two (72) hours or if a slip form paving machine has been used, all exposed surfaces
shall also be cured.
5. Contractor shall reapply curing membrane damaged during joint sawing operations.
K. Protection: Contractor shall protect the concrete work against damage or defacement of
any kind until it has been accepted by the City.
All vehicular traffic shall be prohibited from using the new concrete pavement until it has
attained seventy percent (70%) of the 28-day compressive design strength. Concrete
strength will be determined by cylinders cast and tested in accordance with this Section.
Concrete pavement which is not acceptable to the City Engineer because of damage or
defacement, shall be removed and replaced, or repaired to the satisfaction of the City
Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor.

3.03 JOINTS
Joints shall be formed at right angles to the true alignment of the pavement and to the depths
and configuration specified by the Standard Details or as defined within the Construction
Documents.
A. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be placed at all locations where shown within
the Construction Documents or as directed by the Engineer.
1. General: Expansion joint filler shall extend the entire width of the pavement and from
the sub-grade to one (1) inch below the surface of the pavement or the material will
have a suitable tear strip provided to allow for the application of the joint sealer.
Expansion joint filler shall remain free from excess concrete.
2. Material: Expansion joints shall be formed by continuous 1/2-inch thick preformed joint
filler cut to the configuration of the pavement section.
3. Stability: Expansion joints shall be secured in such a manner that they will not be
disturbed during the placement, consolidation, and finishing of the concrete.
4. Dowels: If expansion joints are to be equipped with dowels they shall be of the size
and type specified, and shall be firmly supported in place, by means of a dowel basket
Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 6
Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

which shall remain in place. One half of each dowel shall be painted or lubricated with
a product approved by the Engineer.
B. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints shall be of the type and dimensions and at the
spacing shown within the Construction Documents.
1. Hand Tooled: Contraction joints for sidewalk and curb shall be hand tooled if the
concrete is not placed with a slip form machine. Contraction joints for shared use
paths shall be saw-cut.
2. Sawing: The saw cut shall be approximately 1/4-inch wide, and the depth shall be one
fourth (1/4) the thickness of the slab, or as shown within the Construction Documents.
(a) Sawed contraction joints shall be cut by means of wet sawing with an approved
concrete saw. The joints shall not be sawed until the concrete has hardened to
the extent that tearing and raveling is precluded.
(b) Joints shall be sawed during the initial curing period and the sawing shall begin
before the pavement starts shrinking and before uncontrolled cracking begins to
occur.
(c) In no case shall the pavement be left over night without having the joints sawed
(d) Material created by sawing shall be flushed from the pavement before it has had
time to dry or set.
3. Dowels: If contraction joints are to be equipped with dowels they shall be of the size
and type specified within the Construction Documents, and shall be firmly supported in
place and accurately aligned parallel to the pavement line and grade with allowable
tolerance of 1/8-inch.
C. Construction Joints: Construction Joints shall be placed as shown on the plans or where
the Contractor’s construction procedure may require them to be placed.
Construction joints shall be placed wherever concrete placement is suspended for more
than thirty (30) minutes. The joint shall be placed in a location consistent with a planned
contraction or expansion joint.
All construction joint tie bars shall be drilled and epoxy coated, unless keyways are
permitted by the City Engineer.
D. Tiebars: Tiebars shall be of deformed steel of the dimensions specified within the
Construction Documents. Tiebars shall be installed at the specified spacing and firmly
secured so as not to be disturbed by the construction procedure. Tiebars shall be drilled to
a minimum depth of 6 inches unless specified otherwise by the City Engineer.
Tiebars shall be evenly spaced along the length of the slab and no tiebar shall be within two
(2) feet of a contraction joint. Tiebars shall be supported in the proper position by chairs
driven into the subgrade or may be placed by approved mechanical methods into the plastic
concrete within the limits of the finishing screed. Tie bars shall not be inserted by “driving”
or “stabbing” them into the finished consolidated concrete.
E. Backfill: A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours shall lapse before forms are removed and
five (5) days shall lapse or the concrete must have attained seventy percent (70%) of its 28-
day compressive strength before pavement shall be backfilled, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
Backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 4110 – Grading and Site Preparation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and/or replacement of any existing street
pavement disturbed by the backfilling operations.
Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 7
Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

F. Joint Sealing and Cleanup: All joint material shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions. Joints shall be sealed with within seven (7) days of the
placement of the concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of excess dirt, rock, broken concrete,
concrete splatters and overspray from the area of the construction prior to the installation of
sealant.
G. Repairing Defects: Any concrete found not to be formed as indicated on the plans, or out
of alignment or level, or having a defective surface, or damaged prior to acceptance of the
project by the City shall be considered as not conforming to the intent of these
specifications and may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Surface defects such as ridges and bulges shall be removed by grinding. Honeycombed
and other defective concrete that does not affect the structural integrity of the structure shall
be chipped out and the vacated area shall be filled. The methods used in this type of repair
shall be approved by the City Engineer. Materials used for patching shall be a non-shrink,
non-metallic grout with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of five thousand (5,000)
psi or a similar material approved by the City Engineer. Prior to placement of the repair
filling, the contact surface of the affected area shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose and
foreign material and shall be coated with an epoxy bonding agent.
Concrete repair work shall conform to Chapter 9 of ACI 301 and shall be performed in a
manner that will not interfere with thorough curing of surrounding concrete. Repair work
shall be adequately cured and protected from further damage.

3.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS


A. Cold Weather Concrete: The Contractor shall comply fully with the provisions of ACI 306.
The following additional conditions apply:
1. Unless authorized by the City Engineer, mixing and concreting operations shall be
discontinued when the descending ambient air temperature reaches 40° F or when
forecast to drop below 40° F within 24 hours of placement, and shall not be resumed
until an ascending ambient air temperature reaches 35° F.
2. Concrete shall be protected from freezing by covering and insulating the concrete or by
heating an enclosed area surrounding the concrete whenever the temperature is
expected to drop below 40° F. The concrete shall be protected immediately after
placement, and for three (3) days after placing the concrete.
3. When concrete work is authorized during cold weather, the aggregates may be heated
by methods approved by the City Engineer prior to being placed in the mixer. No
ingredient that is frozen or contains ice shall be placed in the mixer.
4. The temperature of the concrete shall be not less than 60° F and not more than 95° F
at the time of placement in the forms.
5. Under no circumstances shall concreting operations continue when the air temperature
is less than 20° F. No concrete shall be placed on frozen subgrade.
6. Sudden cooling of concrete shall not be permitted.
7. Concrete damaged by frost action or freezing weather shall be removed and replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
B. Hot Weather Concrete: The Contractor shall comply fully with the provisions of ACI 305.
The following additional conditions apply:

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 8


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

1. Any time the ambient air temperature exceeds 80° F at the time of placement, the
provisions of ACI 305 shall be implemented.
2. In no case shall the temperature of the concrete, when placed, exceed 95° F.
3. Forms, reinforcing and subgrade surfaces against which the concrete is to be placed
shall be wetted down immediately before placement.
4. After finishing operations have been completed and immediately after the bleed water
has left the surface, the curing compound shall be applied.
(a) If the concrete becomes dry before the curing compound has been applied, the
concrete shall be moist cured.
(b) Moist curing shall be accomplished by means of fog sprays, wet burlap, cotton mats,
or other means acceptable to the City Engineer.
(c) Moist curing shall be continued for three (3) days. After the third day, the moist
curing methods can be stopped and a curing compound shall be applied.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


Refer to section 4210, 4215, 4220, 4225, 4230 of the SDCM for measurement and payment
requirements.

END OF SECTION

Division 4400 Concrete 4405 - 9


Section 4405 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4400 CONCRETE

SECTION 4410 – FLOWABLE FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the use of flowable fill material in both excavatable and non-excavatable
applications.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C150/C150M-22 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
2. C260/C260M10a - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
3. C33/C33M-18 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
4. C94/C94M-22a - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
5. C494/C494M-19e1 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
6. C618-22 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
7. D698-12(2021) - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort
8. C1602/C1602M-22 - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
9. D4318-17e1 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils
10. D4832-16e1 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low
Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders
11. D6103/D6103M-17e1 - Standard Test Method for Flow Consistency of Controlled Low
Strength Material (CLSM)

1.03 SUBMITTALS
All items listed in Part 2 of this section shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, including
cut sheets and certifications prior to use on the project.
A. Mix Designs: Flowable Fill (CLSM) compressive strength testing results are required for
approval of mix design prior to placement of flowable backfill. Compressive tests are to be
conducted at seven and 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832-16e1. CLSM shall have
a minimum and maximum 28-day design compressive strength of 75 psi and 150 psi,
respectively. The unit weight of the CLSM shall range between 105 to 125 lbs. per cubic
foot (pcf). All tests necessary for determining conformance with the requirements specified
herein will be at the Contractor’s expense.

Division 4400 Concrete 4410-1


Section 4410 Flowable Fill 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Flowable Fill: Flowable fill, also often referred to as controlled low strength material,
flowcrete, lean mix backfill, flowable mortar, liquid dirt, and controlled density fill, is a
mixture of Portland cement and/or fly ash, aggregates, water, and possibly chemical
admixtures that, as the cement hydrates, forms a soil replacement material. Flowable fill is
a self-leveling and self-compacting, flowable, cementitious material that is primarily used as
a backfill or structural fill in lieu of compacted fill or unsuitable native soil.
B. Excavatable: Excavatable flowable fill shall have a three-day compressive strength
greater than 20 psi and a 28-day compressive strength not greater than 150 psi.
C. Non-Excavatable: Non-excavatable flowable fill shall have a 28-day compressive strength
greater than 300 psi.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: The Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150/C150M-22, Type I or Type II
B. Fly Ash: Fly ash, when used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618-22 Class C
or F.
C. Fine Aggregates: Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33/C33M-18.
D. Air Entrainment: Air Entrainment shall meet the requirements set forth in the current
ASTM C260/C260M10a.
E. Mixing Water: Mixing water shall conform to C1602/C1602M-22.
F. Admixtures: Water reducing admixtures, when used, shall conform to ASTM
C494/C494M-19e1. All other admixtures shall only be used when approved by the
Engineer.
G. Other materials: Proposed replacement or supplementary materials shall be approved by
the Engineer and in conformance with current National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
(NRMCA) or American Concrete Institute (ACI) guidelines for CLSM.

2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Ready Mix Batch Plants: Ready mix batch plants shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C94/C94M-22a.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
Weather Limitations: When the ambient temperature is either falling or forecasted to fall below
35O F within 24 hours of its proposed placement time, the Contractor may submit the use of
cold weather methods for approval by the Engineer.
A. Testing: Flowable fill shall have a flow of six to eight inches when tested in accordance
with ASTM D6103/D6103M-17e1. Test cylinders will be made when directed by the
Engineer and whenever the mixture is changed. The cylinders will be cast and tested in
accordance with Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

Division 4400 Concrete 4410-2


Section 4410 Flowable Fill 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

B. Displacement: Flowable Fill material shall be carefully placed to avoid damage to or


displacement of the pipe, other utilities or structures.
C. Standing Water: No Flowable Backfill (CLSM) shall be placed on frozen ground or in
standing water.
D. Placement: Flowable fill shall be placed in the excavation so all voids around the structure
or in the excavation are filled.
E. Acceptance: Acceptance of components will be as specified in this Section. Acceptance of
placed material will be based on the results of compressive strength tests or visual
inspection of the material being placed by the Engineer.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 FLOWABLE FILL


A. Unit: Cubic yards, measured by the batch ticket(s)
B. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price, unless considered subsidiary
to other Bid Items.

END OF SECTION

Division 4400 Concrete 4410-3


Section 4410 Flowable Fill 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4500 TRAFFIC DEVICES

SECTION 4505 – STREET LIGHTING CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of all material, equipment, and labor for the installation and
testing of the street lighting system as shown on the plans and as indicated in the following
specifications, or as directed by the City Engineer. All incidental parts which are not shown on
the plans or specified herein and which are necessary to complete the street lighting system shall
be furnished and installed as though such parts were shown on the plans or specified herein.
All systems shall be complete and in operation to the satisfaction of the City Engineer at the
time of acceptance of the work.

1.2 ADMINISTRATION
A. Materials: A complete list of pre-approved street lighting materials can be found in the
Shawnee Design & Construction Manual (SDCM) located on the Public Works Department
page of the City of Shawnee’s website at: www.cityofshawnee.org or by contacting the
Public Works Department.
B. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements of these Specifications and the
Construction Documents, all material and work shall conform to the requirements of the
National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), the standards
of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) and the American Standards
Associations (ASA), and local ordinances. All electrical equipment shall also conform to the
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Concrete shall
conform to the Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB).
All references in these specifications or in the Special Provisions to the standards
mentioned above shall be construed to mean the standard that is in effect at the date of
advertising of these specifications.
C. Permits: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining an electrical building permit from the
City’s Codes Administration Division before any excavation for the control center foundation
or the service feed takes place. The Contractor shall contact the City’s Codes
Administration Division for an electrical inspection when the control center is ready.
The Contractor is responsible for obtaining such permits and approvals as may be required
by the appropriate electrical utility company and is responsible for all costs associated with
extending electrical power from the service point to the control center whatever the distance.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the City to notify the appropriate electrical utility
company ahead of when the system needs to be energized.
The Transportation Manager will assign an address for the control center, which the
Contractor shall use when obtaining permits and when dealing with the electrical utility
company.
The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department prior to project work beginning,

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 1


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

including trenching, pole installation, and any concrete foundation installation and to request
final project inspection. Pole locations shall be staked and approved by the City Engineer
prior to installation. The Contractor shall keep the City Engineer apprised as to the progress
of the project and the Contractor’s proposed schedule. The Inspector or Project Engineer
may, at their discretion, cause any work completed without their knowledge or
inspection to be dismantled and inspected to their satisfaction.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. KDOT Standard Specification:
1. Section 814 – Electrical Lighting Systems and Traffic Signals
2. Section 1703 – Electrical Lighting and Traffic Signal Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS
Before commencing the installation of any material or equipment, the Contractor shall submit
one electronic copy of complete shop drawings for manufactured materials and equipment to
the Engineer for approval in pdf format. Manufacturers’ bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive
data that contain cuts, dimensions, specifications and wiring diagrams will be acceptable for
standard cataloged equipment. Such bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive data shall be clearly
marked to show the item to be used to satisfy a required item in the schedule of materials shown
on the Plans, or as specified in the Special Provisions. Shop drawings should be certified by
the manufacturer to be in conformance with the project plans and specifications including
conformance with all material specifications. The City Engineer may require other descriptive
data, drawings, and diagrams for non-cataloged equipment or materials. In the event any items
of material or equipment contained on the shop drawings fail to comply with the specification
requirements, such items may be rejected by the Engineer. Orders for material and equipment
shall not be placed until written approval is obtained from the City Engineer.
If shop drawings are required to be submitted as a result of proposed field modifications of a
structure, a registered professional engineer shall seal those shop drawings prior to submittal to
the City.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
All lighting equipment shall be new and of the best grade and shall be approved by the
Engineer. All material used in the fabrication or assembly of the items below shall comply with
this specification and the applicable parts of the KDOT Standard Specifications, Section 814,
“Electrical Lighting and Traffic Signals” and KDOT Section 1703, “Electrical Lighting and Traffic
Signal Equipment”.
A. Aluminum Standards: The type of pole and length of luminaire arm (if any) shall be as
specified within the Construction Documents. This pole specification is in addition to the
Standard Details pertaining to streetlight poles. The manufacturer, supplier and Contractor
shall guarantee that the shafts and arms provided on this project shall remain without defect
for a period of five (5) years.
1. 30' AND 40' POLES
Shaft: The aluminum lighting shaft assembly shall be spun from one piece of
seamless tubing and after fabrication, it shall have mechanical strength of not less

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 2


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

than T6 temper. The cross section of the pole shall be round, and the shaft shall
be fabricated in a continuous true taper from at least 6" above the handhole to the
top of the shaft. The shaft shall have no longitudinal or circumferential welds,
except at the lower end joining the shaft to the base. To protect the shaft during
shipping, the assembly shall be tire wrapped with a non-staining paper. The top of
the pole shaft shall be equipped with a cast aluminum removable top held securely
in place by means of set screws. Pole shafts shall have a minimum 4” x 6” handhole
with frame and cover and a grounding lug opposite the handhole.
Pole dimensions shall be as specified on the pole detail sheet - Table 1. It is the
responsibility of the fabricator to verify and attest that the material sizes proposed
are structurally adequate and in full compliance with this specification and the pole
detail sheet.
a) Shoe Base: The four-bolt shoe base shall be a permanent mold casting made of
aluminum alloy 356.0 T6. The base shall be free of cracks, pits, and blow holes
and of sufficient size and strength to withstand full design loads. The base shall
telescope the shaft; and the one weld shall be on the inside of the base at the end
of the shaft, while the other weld shall be on the outside at the top of the base.
The shoe base and the two (2) welds shall develop the full strength of the pole
assembly. The shoe base flange shall have four slotted holes for anchorage.
Four bolts, four nuts, four removable bolt covers, and eight washers shall be
provided with each pole. The bolt covers shall attach to the upright portion of the
body of the base. The bolt circle is provided in Table 1 of the pole detail sheet.
b) Luminaire Arm:
1) The single member arm shall be tapered by cold working from round
tubing, made of Aluminum Association Alloy 6063-T6. After tapering, the
member shall be flattened to produce an elliptical cross-section with the
major diameter in the vertical plane, perpendicular to the wind. The
outboard end of the arm shall remain round with a two-inch (2") slipfitter
for mounting the luminaire. The single member arm shall be designed to
meet given design factors and mounting dimensions.
2) The truss type member arm assembly shall be a one piece welded
assembly consisting of an upper arm and lower arm (brace) securely
joined by a vertical strut and a connector or weld at the outboard end of
the arm assembly. The upper arm shall be a tapered-elliptical aluminum
tubing by cold working from round tubing. After tapering, the upper arm
shall then be flattened to produce an elliptical cross-section with the major
diameter in the horizontal plane, parallel to the wind. The outboard end of
the upper arm shall remain round with a two-inch (2") slipfitter for
mounting the luminaire. The lower arm (brace) shall be 2” Schedule 40
pipe and the outboard end shall be covered by an end cap. The vertical
strut shall be and arm connector shall conform to aluminum alloy 6061-T6
or 6063-T6 extruded.
2. 14' POLE.
(a) Shaft: The 14' lighting shaft shall be spun from one piece of seamless aluminum
alloy tubing 6063-T6, free from longitudinal welds and with ground satin surface
finish unless otherwise designated with an alternate surface, as shown in the plans.
The cross section of the pole shall be round, and the shaft shall be fabricated

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 3


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

in a continuous true taper from at least six inches (6") above the 4” x 6” (min.)
handhole to the top of the shaft. The shaft shall have no longitudinal or
circumferential welds, except at the lower end joining the shaft to the base. To
protect the shaft during shipping, the shaft shall be tire wrapped with a non-
staining paper. The pole shall be installed with the handhole perpendicular to the
direction of travel on the side of the pole away from traffic. For example, for a
north/south road, the handhole shall face north on the right side of the roadway,
and south on the left side of the roadway. On an east/west road, the handhole
shall face east on the right side of the roadway, and west on the left side of the
roadway.
Pole dimensions shall be as specified on the pole detail sheet - Table 1. It is the
responsibility of the fabricator to verify and attest that the material sizes proposed
are structurally adequate and in full compliance with this specification and pole
detail sheet.
The pole shall have a 3" O.D. slipfitter end, without a tenon, for mounting the
post-top luminaire.
(b) Shoe Base: The four-bolt aluminum alloy 356.0 T6 shoe base shall be a
permanent mold casting. The base shall be free of cracks, pits, and blow holes
and of sufficient size and strength to withstand full design loads. The base shall
telescope the shaft; and the one weld shall be on the inside of the base at the
end of the shaft while the other weld shall be on the outside at the top of the
base. The shoe base and the two (2) welds shall develop the full strength of the
pole assembly.
The base shall be cast with four (4) slotted holes to receive the anchor bolts-
threaded studs and tapped holes for attaching the four (4) cast aluminum alloy
removable bolt covers provided for each pole. Four (4) 1” x 3” removable
hexhead steel bolts, four (4) nuts, four (4) removable bolt covers, and eight (8)
washers shall be provided when the screw-in base is used meeting ASTM B26 or
B108 Standards. The bolt covers shall attach to the upright portion of the body of
the base. The bolt circle is provided in Table 1 of the pole detail sheet.
B. Breakaway Supports: Aluminum Breakaway Supports shall be a cast transformer base.
The transformer base will act as an anchor base meeting structural requirements and
breakaway criteria specified in Breakaway supports shall also be approved by the Federal
Highway Administration (FHWA) as meeting the change in velocity and stub height
breakaway requirements adopted by the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals. Breakaway Supports shall be supplied as
shown on the plans and Standard Drawings, or as specified in the Special Provisions.
C. Foundations: Screw-in foundations are the preferred foundation type and may be used as
shown on the plans. The foundations shall be of the size and type required in the details
based on the pole mounting height. The anchors shall be screwed into the ground within
the maximum and minimum torque ratings per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Pre-
drilling of holes for the anchor is prohibited, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The foundation shall be screwed straight into the ground and the baseplate shall be
plumbed with a level and flush with the finish grade. Minor leveling adjustments may be
made with the use of leveling shims or washers. Shims and washers shall be galvanized or
cadmium-plated steel no more than 0.25” (6.35 mm) thick. Only one shim or washer will be

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 4


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

allowed at any one anchor bolt with a maximum of two on any pole.
Where street light foundations are to be installed in areas of fill (embankment), resulting
from roadway grading improvements or if rock is encountered, a concrete foundation shall
be installed. If screw-in foundations cannot be used for any reason, concrete foundations
shall be installed at the contractor’s expense.
D. Illumination Equipment: The manufacturer, type and model of approved, acceptable
luminaires shall be supplied as shown on the Plans or Standard Drawings, or as specified
in the Special Provisions.
1. Cobra Head Luminaire: Cobra Head style luminaires shall be constructed of a single
piece die-cast aluminum alloy, one-piece upper and lower housing and hinged at the
back and latched on the street side. The luminaire shall be equipped with an integral
slipfitter for 2-inch luminaire arm mounting as well as an integrated leveling bubble.
The mounting device shall allow the luminary to be mounted absolutely level and
shall have no more than four (4) fasteners serving both the leveling and clamping
functions. It shall allow one man to install the luminaire by simultaneously holding it
in position and tightening the fasteners, such that the luminaire will be properly
level at the first attempt. The luminaire shall be equipped with a 'trigger latch' for easy,
one-hand, no-tools opening of the fixture for installation and serving. A factory
installed bird guard shall fit snugly around the mounting device. The luminaire shall
provide a moisture proof and dust proof chamber and weather protection for the driver.
A removable power-pad/module with quick-connect electrical hookup for easy
installation of the electrical system and easy access to the driver compartment shall
be mounted on the door. Top housing mounting or a bridge assembly configuration will
not be accepted.
The sealed optical assembly shall be a true 90° cutoff.
The luminaire shall be preset at the factory to provide I.E.S. Type III Medium Cutoff light
distribution.
The luminaire shall not be provided with a photocell receptacle unless otherwise noted
on the plans or special provisions. See Approved Material Listing in the SDCM located
on the Public Works Department webpage.

(a) LED Luminaries: The luminaire shall be pre-wired, requiring only connection of
service wires to a terminal board. Luminaires shall be equipped with 42 individual
LED’s and a 525 mA driver at a voltage of 120/208/240/277 volts. The entire
driver shall be mounted on a power door or drop assembly and be easily
removable and replaceable with gloved hands and without tools through the use
of quick disconnecting mechanical devices and electrical plugs.
(b) LED Equivalents:

70 Watt LED = 4000K Class A LED

150 Watt Induction = 4000K Class C LED

250 Watt Induction = 4000K Class D LED

Cobra Head Luminaire = 3000K Class D LED

64 Watt LED = 3000K Class D LED

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 5


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

80 Watt LED = 3000K Class E LED

Post-Top Luminaire: The luminaire housing shall be constructed of cast aluminum and
painted black. The driver shall be a regulator type, high power factor, for LED at a
voltage of 120/208/240/277 volts. The driver components shall be housed in a totally
enclosed integral compartment, and the optical section of the unit shall be completely
sealed and gasketed. The pressed prismatic refractor shall be one piece polycarbonate
plastic. The refractor shall be for I.E.S. Type III distribution or Type V if specified on the
plans. See Approved Material Listing in SDCM located on the Development Services
Department webpage.
2. Lamps: Lamp life for LED shall be rated not less than one- hundred thousand
(100,000) hours. LED lamps shall have an operating frequency ranging between 50-
60 Hz, and a Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 20%.
E. Electrical Material: The types and lengths of cables shall be supplied as shown on the
Plans or Standard Drawings, or as specified in the Special Provisions.
1. Secondary Cable and Power Lead-In Cable: Power lead-in cable shall be #2 A.W.G.
and, unless otherwise specified on the plans, secondary cable shall be #4 A.W.G.
stranded annealed copper, single conductor cables for operation at 600 volts
maximum. Material shall meet the applicable requirements of I.P.C.E.A. Standard S-
19-81, with thermoplastic insulation of GRS-Rubber base meeting Appendix K (A) of
I.P.C.E.A. and listed by U.L. as Type U.S.E. for direct burial; or material shall meet the
applicable requirements of I.P.C.E.A. Standard S-66-524, interim standard #2, with
thermo setting insulation of cross link polyethylene meeting requirements of Column
"A" of I.P.C.E.A. and listed by U.L. as Type U.S.E. RHW-75°C.
2. Pole Wiring: Pole wiring above the hand hole in pole up to luminaire(s) shall be single
conductor cable with minimum 600 volt rating, No. 10 A.W.G. Type THHN/THWN.
Conductor shall be stranded annealed copper. A #10 AWG copper grounding
conductor shall be run from each luminaire head to the ground lug inside the pole.
F. Control Center Pedestal: Control center shall be an underground service type, rated for
100 amperes or 200 amperes (as specified on the plans), 240 volts, unless otherwise noted
and capable of operating four-circuits. Pedestal shall be 0.125 Aluminum rain-tight
construction with individual meter, panel, contactor, and rear service pull "compartments."
Meter and panel/contactor compartments shall have piano hinged doors with padlocking
provisions. The panel and contactor compartments shall have an inside panel door. The
outer front and inside panel doors shall be equipped with an approved doorstop. Meter
base shall be of the type used by the local utility. Panelboard shall have silver plated
copper buss and shall accept 12 - 1 inch plug-in breakers manufactured by GE or
Westinghouse. Panelboard compartment shall contain photocell, convenience receptacle,
and test switch. All factory installed wire shall be copper. Control center shall be U.L.
listed. Pedestal finish shall be aluminum unless noted on the plans. See approved material
listing.

Photoelectric cells shall be of the solid-state type operating on 240 volts, and shall operate
on a line supply of 50 to 60 hertz. The load capacity of the photoelectric cell relays shall be
a minimum of 1000 watts. The photoelectric cell circuitry shall be designed to be normally
closed at night. The photoelectric cell shall be configured such that in the event of
failure, the lights shall be on. The photoelectric cell shall be mounted inside the power

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 6


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

supply cabinet such that all luminaires within the system operate simultaneously and shall
illuminate only during hours of darkness or low visibility. Turn-on shall occur at 2.6
footcandles +/- 0.5 footcandles. The photoelectric cell shall have an inverse off/on ratio
for energy savings. Photoelectric cells shall sense light levels with a non-drifting
phototransistor and a time delay to avoid turn off due to lightning and transient light.
G. Conduit: The type, size and length of conduit and fittings shall be supplied as shown on
the Plans or Standard Drawings, or as specified in the Special Provisions. The contractor
may furnish and install Schedule 40 polyvinyl (PVC), or high-density polyethylene (HDPE)
conduit for the distribution system. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be used
where conduit is to be installed on a structure.
1. PVC Conduit Material: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be two-inch (2”), or as sized in
the plans, Schedule 40 PVC conduit. The conduit shall bear an Underwriters'
Laboratories label and shall conform to Federal Specification WC-1094A (latest
version). Fittings shall be fabricated from PVC and have the same chemical and
physical properties as the conduit with which it is being used.
Two-inch (2”) Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is required under all road
and commercial driveway crossings, or as otherwise sized in the plans.
2. HDPE Conduit Material: Flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be 2” Schedule 40, high-
density polyethylene conduit (HDPE). The conduit shall be smooth walled inside and
out. The conduit shall be gray in color, and equipped with a polypropylene pull rope.
The conduit shall be manufactured to ASTM D2447 and NEMA TC7 specifications and
shall meet the following applicable requirements:

Minimum Wall Thickness: 2” Schedule 40 – 0.154”


Tensile Strength: 3,300 psi ASTM D-638
Elongation: >800% ASTM D-638
Density: 60 lbs/cu. ft. ASTM D-1505
Melt Index: 0.011 oz./10 min. ASTM D-1238(E)
Brittle Temp.: <-103º F. ASTM D-746ESCR (Bell
>1500 F50 hrs. Test): ASTM D-1693(C)

Rockwell Hardness: L 49 ASTM D-785


Shore Hardness : D 61 ASTM D-2240

3. HDPE Conduit Fittings: An approved factory coupling (PNA E-Loc or approved equal)
shall be used for connection of the HDPE conduit to a 90° factory PVC elbow or
between two lengths of HDPE conduit. The coupling shall be of high-density
polyethylene. The coupling shall have individual reverse-locking threads with a built-in
center stop. The ends of the conduit shall be grooved with a grooving tool to match the
reverse-locking threads of the couple to provide for greater pull-out resistance. The
coupling shall be installed with a factory recommended coupling to ensure an airtight
and watertight lock.

Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS): Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be in accordance
with ANSI C80.1. GRS conduit shall be galvanized on both the inside and the outside

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 7


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

surfaces. The weight (mass) of zinc coating shall be no less than 0.5 ounce per
square foot of coated surface, as determined in accordance with AASHTO T 65. The
interior or exterior surface, or both, may be given a coating of suitable material to
facilitate installation of wires and cables and to permit the conduit to be readily
distinguished from pipe used for purposes other than electrical. All metal conduit ends
shall be provided with a bushing to protect the cable from abrasion. Fittings shall be in
accordance with ANSI C80.4. A sufficient number of conduit hangars shall be supplied
to attach the GRS conduit to the structure, as recommended by the manufacturer. One
(1) No. 6 AWG, bare copper ground wire shall be attached to each end of the GRS
conduit with a grounding busing. The ground wire shall be connected to a ground rod
at each end of a GRS conduit run, or extended to an adjacent GRS conduit or ground
rod.
H. Service and Junction Boxes: The type and size of service and junction boxes shall be
supplied as shown on the Plans. The Contractor may also use precast concrete junction
boxes with cast iron covers, or reinforced plastic mortar junction boxes as may be shown
on the plans and as specified on the pre-approved material listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notification: The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department (913) 742-6008
prior to construction to set up a pre-construction meeting in the field.

3.2 INSTALLATION
Only well trained, qualified laborers shall be allowed to perform construction functions related to
street lighting, including familiarity with the applicable sections of the NEC.

A. Pole and Luminaire Installation: Street light poles and luminaires shall be installed as
shown on the Plans and Standard Drawings, and as specified in the Special Provisions or
as directed by the Engineer.
1. Pole Wiring: The luminaire shall be connected to the secondary cables through in-line,
waterproof, breakaway fuseholders. All secondary cable connections inside a pole
base shall be made with Fargo #GO-32 multiple tap connectors with slipover rubber
boots. The Contractor shall install in-line waterproof, breakaway fused and non-fused
disconnects in each pole base. Two (2) fused disconnects for each hot lead shall be
Buchanan 65, and one (1) non-fused "dummy fuse" disconnect for the ground shall be
Buchanan 20. Type KTK 8-amp high interrupting fuses, or approved equal, shall be
installed. The multiple tap connectors and fuseholders shall be installed convenient to
the handhole at the base of the pole. One (1) foot of surplus cable shall be coiled at
the line side of the multiple tap connector, between the multiple tap connector and the
fused disconnect, and on the load side of the fused disconnect. The connectors for the
ground shall be installed with the male end of the connector on the line side.
The incoming distribution ground wire and ground rod grounding wire shall be fastened
to the factory-installed grounding lug in the base of the pole by a three-eighths inch
(⅜") ring terminal and ⅜" - 16 x ¾" long hex bolt. Additionally, a 1c#10 AWG ground
wire shall be run from each luminaire head to the ground lug.
The pole wiring shall be color coded (black = hot, white = neutral, green = ground) and

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 8


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

without splices from the fuseholder to the connection at the luminaire. Luminaires
(post-top) not equipped with terminal blocks shall be connected to the pole wiring with
approved butt connectors.
All cable re-connections at existing light poles shall be made with new approved
connector kits.

Pole and Luminaire Erection on a Screw Anchor Foundation: The 30’ or 40’ pole shall
be fastened to the foundation with a breakaway transformer base using pole
manufacturer recommended bolts and nuts. The nut shall be on top. A washer shall
be installed under the bolt head and another under the nut. The pole shall be checked
for plumb, minor corrections made using galvanized or cadmium plated steel shim
stock, the nuts tightened and the anchor bolt covers installed. Handhole covers shall
be situated so that they are away from oncoming traffic.
2. Pole and Luminaire Erection on a Concrete Foundation: No sooner than five (5) days
after construction of the foundation, a nut and washer shall be installed on each anchor
bolt. The 30’ or 40’ pole will be mounted to a breakaway transformer base using nuts,
bolts, and washers as recommended by the pole manufacturer. Using the lower nuts,
the pole shall be brought into vertical alignment (plumb), the top nuts tightened, and
the anchor bolt covers installed. The opening between the pole base and the
foundation shall be taped and grouted. Handhole covers shall be situated so that they
are away from oncoming traffic. In a median, the hand holes should be oriented away
from one direction of oncoming traffic, facing north or east, for all poles installed in
medians.
3. Luminaire on Mast Arm: The luminaire slipfitter shall be installed on the davit supplied
with the mast arm. The luminaire and davit shall project from the street side of the pole
and be perpendicular to the curb line.
4. Luminaire Adjustment: The luminaire shall be adjusted and leveled in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions, to place the nadir directly below the light center.
Cobrahead luminaires should typically be installed such that the frontal view of the
luminaire is parallel to the road surface, while in the side view the luminaire should be
horizontal.

5. Storage and Protection: Poles and mast arms shall be kept dry and out of the weather
until time for erection. The manufacturer’s protective paper wrapper may be removed
for inspection upon receipt from the manufacturer.
6. Clean Up: Poles and luminaires shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, etc. Scratches,
abrasions or other surface damage shall be repaired to like new condition.
B. Foundations: Foundation anchors and reinforcing steel shall be of the size and type
required by the standard details for the pole(s) specified on the plans.
1. Screw-In Foundations: The anchors shall be screwed into the ground. Pre-drilling of
holes for the anchor is not allowed. During installation the foundation shall be plumbed
with a level. The foundation shall be screwed straight into the ground and the base
plate shall be level. Minor leveling adjustments may be made with the use of leveling
shims or washers. Shims and washers shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated steel no
more than 1/4 inch thick. Only one shim or washer will be allowed at any one anchor
bolt with a maximum of two on any pole. If screw-in foundation anchors are not able to
be used for any reason, concrete foundations shall be installed at the Contractor's
expense.
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 9
Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Concrete Foundations: The bottom of the concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground;
foundations shall be poured monolithic. Forms shall be true to line and grade. Top of
footing for standards, except special foundations, shall be finished to curb, or sidewalk
grade or as directed by the Engineer. Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in
place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in proper position, to proper
heights, and held in place by means of a template until the concrete sets. Anchor
bolts shall be provided with hex head nut, flat washer and lock washer. Both forms
and ground which will contact the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened before placing
concrete.
Pole base and control center foundations shall be KCMMB 5K, air entrained, 28-day
compressive strength Portland Cement Concrete.
Reinforcing steel for concrete bases shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions
and shapes shown on the standard details. Cutting and bending tolerances for
reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute’s Manual of Standard Practice. Flame cutting of coated
reinforcing steel may be permitted. Reinforcing steel shall be protected from damage
at all times. When placed in the work and before concrete is placed, reinforcing steel
shall be free from dirt, oil paint, grease, loose mill scale, thick rust, any dried mortar
and other foreign substances. A thin layer of powdery rust may remain. Reinforcing
bars shall be positively secured against displacement. The bars shall be firmly tied at
alternate crossings or closer. The steel shall be spot welded or tied in the correct
position with proper clearance maintained between the forms and reinforcement.
Splicing of bars shall not be allowed. Concrete shall not be placed until forms and
reinforcing steel have been checked and approved by the City Project Engineer or
Inspector.
Concrete pole bases shall be consolidated by an internal type vibrator. The vibrator
shall operate at frequencies of vibration not less than 4,500 cycles per minute under
load. The amplitude of vibration shall be adequate to consolidate concrete properly.
The concrete shall be cured with an approved moisture barrier such as wet burlap,
polyethylene, etc., for a period of seventy-two (72) hours. Cold weather curing shall be
such that the concrete temperature shall be maintained above freezing for the entire
curing period. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete is thoroughly set.
The exposed portions of the foundation shall be finished to present a neat appearance.
Finishing should be done with the positioning jig in place. If the jig must be removed
for finishing, it shall be re-installed immediately after finishing and left in place
throughout the cure period. A safety device (traffic cone, Type I barricade, etc.) shall
be installed and secured firmly in place over each foundation immediately after finishing
and remain in place until the pole or pedestal is installed. Prior to installing the pole
or pedestal, the positioning jig shall be removed, loose concrete cleaned from around
the anchor bolts and conduits, and the conduits trimmed to provide proper clearance
for the pole or pedestal.
C. Wiring: The roadway lighting conductor system shall be installed in HDPE or 2” SCH 40 or
80 PVC conduit, or as otherwise sized in the plans, wired and installed as a 240 volt system
where indicated, required and shown on the plans. Wiring shall conform to the appropriate
articles of the National Electric Code. Wiring shall be continuous from street lighting
appurtenance to street lighting appurtenance. No splices of cable will be permitted in
conduit or outside of service boxes, junction boxes or pole bases.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 10


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Powdered soapstone, talc or other approved lubricant shall be used when inserting
conductors in conduit. All cable to be installed in one conduit shall be pulled by the
Contractor in one operation, and all ends shall be taped to exclude moisture and shall be so
kept until the splices are made or terminal appliances attached. Ends of spare conductors
shall be taped.

All splices in junction boxes and service boxes shall be made with appropriate split bolt
connectors and/or applicable secondary cable copper crimp butt connectors. Such splices
shall be carefully wrapped with three successive layers of Scotch (3M) No. 130C, "Linerless
Rubber Splicing Tape" and then wrapped with three layers of Scotch (3M) No. 33+ "Electrical
Tape". The total diameter of the taped splice shall be approximately 1 ½ times the diameter
of the spliced conductor covering. 3M Scotchkote electrical coating shall be “Painted” over
the splice. Two feet of slack shall be left at all control centers, junction boxes and service
boxes for splicing and connecting wires. Wiring within boxes shall be neatly arranged and
laced up. Wires shall be color-coded (black = hot, white = neutral, green = ground) and
circuits permanently identified in accordance with designations used on the plans.
All circuit runs shall be marked with colored tape whenever they come into a pole, junction
or service box, or a control center:

▪ Circuits coming from the north shall be marked with “Blue” tape.
▪ Circuits coming from the south shall be marked with “Purple” tape.
▪ Circuits coming from the east shall be marked with “Yellow” tape.
▪ Circuits coming from the west shall be marked with “Red” tape.

All distribution cable connections inside the base of the light pole shall be made with Fargo
No. GO-32 multiple tap connectors provided with a slipover plastic boot. In-line waterproof,
breakaway fused and non-fused disconnects shall be installed in each light pole base. Two
disconnects for each hot lead (fused) shall be Buchanan 65, and one disconnect for the
ground ("dummy fuse") shall be Buchanan 20. Two additional disconnects for the hot leads
shall be provided for twin luminaire poles (ground disconnect is shared). Fuses shall be
KTK, or approved equal, high interrupting fuses 8-amp. The multiple tap connectors and
fuseholders shall be installed convenient to the handhole at the base of the pole.
One (1) foot of surplus cable shall be coiled at the line side of the multiple tap connector,
between the multiple tap connector and the fused disconnect, and on the load side of the
fused disconnect. The connectors for the ground shall be installed with the male end of the
connector on the line side. The ground wire shall be fastened to the factory installed
ground lug in the base of the light pole by a ⅜" ring terminal and ⅜" - 16 x ¾" long hex bolt.
Luminaires not equipped with terminal blocks (post-top) shall be connected to the pole
wiring with approved butt connectors.
D. Control Center Pedestal and Foundation: The control center assembly, including the
pedestal, circuit breakers, fuses, contactors, photoelectric control, control wiring, meter
socket, service feed, and foundation, shall be constructed and installed as shown on the
Plans and Standard Drawings, and as specified in the Special Provisions or as directed by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate his activities with the appropriate electrical
utility company to insure delivery of power to the control center when and where required.
The control center pedestal shall be cleaned of wrapping, shipping material, dirt, grease,
etc. Scratches, abrasions or other surface damage shall be repaired to like new condition.
The photo cell shall be directed north unless southbound traffic may impact photo cell
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 11
Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

operation. Control center foundations shall have four (4) 2 inch conduits for exiting cables,
one (1) one inch conduit for grounding rod and cable, and one (1) 3 inch conduit for service
cable. Grounding cable for the control center shall be #6 AWG. The direction of the existing
conduit and the orientation of the control center shall be approved by the City Engineer
or Inspector.

Conduit: This work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment
needed for the installation of conduit. All conductors shall be run in conduit between all
lighting equipment locations. Conduit shall be installed as shown on the Plans and
Standard Drawings, and as specified in the Special Provisions or as directed by the Engineer
to avoid underground obstructions. The size of the conduit used shall be as shown on
the Plans, and as specified in the Special Provisions. Schedule 80 PVC conduit shall be
used under existing and proposed street pavement and commercial driveway approaches.
Schedule 40 or schedule 80 PVC or HDPE conduit may be used at all other locations. It
shall be the privilege of the Contractor at his own expense to use larger size conduit if
desired; and where larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of the run
from outlet to outlet. No reducing couplings will be permitted.
1. Installation: The conduit installed under all roadway surfaces shall be placed a
minimum of forty-eight (48) inches below the top of curb elevation; under drives and
within shoulders at a minimum depth of twenty-four (24) inches below finished grade.
Street lighting conduit may be installed in the same trench with traffic signal or fiber
optic conduit. Conduit set in standard bases shall extend approximately three (3) inches
above the foundation vertically. Conduit entering through the bottom of a junction box
shall be located near the ends to leave the major portion of the box clear. Conduit
entering service boxes shall terminate two (2) inches inside the box wall and shall be
sloped to facilitate pulling of cable. At all outlets, conduit shall enter from the direction
of the run.
The ends of all conduits shall be well-reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Field
cuts shall be made square and true so that the ends will butt or come together for the
full diameter thereof. Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not
less than six times (6x) the inside diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are
not used, conduit bends shall be made without crimping or flattening, using the longest
radius practical and utilizing an appropriate conduit bending tool.
Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be blown out
with compressed air.
2. Trenching: In existing paved areas, the actual trench shall be filled with diggable,
folowable backfill. The backfill shall extend to the top of the undisturbed soil under the
existing pavement section. A trench crossing a proposed street shall be backfilled with
clean one-half inch (½") crushed rock (CA-5) to two feet (2') behind the future curb. If
the bottom of the trench is in rock or rocky soil, the conduit shall be placed on a
six-inch (6") protective layer of clean, tamped backfill material. Backfill within six inches
(6”) of the conduit shall be free of rock or other solid material likely to cause damage.
All backfill material shall be compacted to a density at least ninety percent (90%) of the
maximum density for the material used as determined by ASTM D-698. The six inches
(6”) of backfill nearest the conduit shall not be machine compacted.
3. Boring: Conduit for a power lead-in cable to be placed under an existing developed
area outside a street right-of-way shall be installed using approved boring methods.
Also, where a conduit is to be placed under an existing paved surface, it shall be

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 12


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

installed using approved boring methods. No existing developed property outside a


street right-of-way or existing paved surface shall be cut or otherwise disturbed without
the written permission of the City Engineer and then only in the event insurmountable
obstructions are encountered. The conduit shall be bored at a depth of between
twenty-four inches (24”) and thirty-six inches (36”) below the final grade. Boring pits
shall be kept two feet (2’) clear of the edge of any type of pavement wherever possible.
Excessive use of water, such that the paved surface might be undermined or the
subgrade softened, will not be permitted. Boring may be used instead of trenching at
all other locations. Contractor shall be responsible for restoration of site in kind.
E. Boxes: Type 2 Junction Box shall be installed adjacent to the control center pedestal with
all 2” circuit conduits terminating in this service box. Junction boxes and/or service boxes
shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans. However, boxes shall not be located
in sidewalks and driveways. In the unlikely event that a box is placed in a sidewalk or a
driveway, a traffic-rated box shall be used. A box shall also be installed at each end of a
conduit run that crosses the road. The Contractor may install, at his own expense, additional
boxes as may be desired to facilitate the work upon approval of the City Engineer. Junction
and service boxes shall be installed on crushed rock (CA-5) at the designated depths shown
on the standard details or as directed by the City Engineer. Cinders, broken concrete, broken
rock, or other hard or undesirable material shall not be used for backfilling. Unless
otherwise directed by the City Engineer, boxes shall be installed level to 1 inch (25 mm)
above the finish grade.
F. Excavations and Backfilling: Backfill shall be performed in accordance with Section 4110
– Site Preparation Grading and Site Preparation. The contractor shall perform all excavations
for installing underground conduits, cable, boxes and pole bases in whatever substances
encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings, or as otherwise approved. During
excavations, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient
distance from the excavation to avoid slides. Where solid rock, shale, or similar material is
found, the excavation shall be as shown in the plans or as directed by the City Engineer.
H. Sodding: Sod shall be placed in accordance with Section 4120 – Seeding and Sod
I. Decorative Lighting: With approval of the City Engineer, pole modifications may be
approved or requested for decorative lighting. Poles shall be modified to accept a
weatherproof Festoon box containing a ground fault receptacle. Three #10 THHN wires
may be used to provide power.
J. Locations: Unless otherwise noted on the plans, or physical obstructions exist, equipment
installed on this project shall be located as follows:
1. Conduit shall be kept a minimum of one (1) foot behind the back of curb.
2. Street light poles shall be installed on property lines, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, and at least 30” behind the back of curb (to center of pole). Handhole covers
shall be situated so that they are away from oncoming traffic. In a median, the hand
holes should be oriented away from one direction of oncoming traffic, facing North or
East, for all poles installed in medians.
3. Junction boxes shall be installed at least two (2) feet behind the back of curb (to center
of box) and no closer than two feet to any street light pole.
4. Control centers shall be located in accordance with the applicable City Ordinances and
local utility requirements.
K. System Testing: The Contractor is responsible for testing the completed street lighting

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 13


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

system. Prior to acceptance by the City, the Contractor shall notify the Public Works
inspector for an inspection as soon as the system(s) is (are) ready. All street lighting
system elements shall function properly as a complete system for a minimum period of seven
(7) days before acceptance by the City. The seven (7) day period shall be continuous and
initiated by the inspector. Any malfunction observed or recorded shall stop the test period
as of the time of the malfunction. A period shall start when the malfunction has been
repaired to the satisfaction of the inspector. After the burn test is completed, the street light
system(s) must remain in operation if the street is open to vehicle traffic.
L. Maintenance Work: The Contractor is responsible for making all repairs and
replacements, including, downed poles, damaged or cut cables, and streetlight luminaires, to
the street lighting system, regardless of the cause or responsible party, until the entire
system is completed, inspected and accepted by the City.
M. Replacement of Damaged Property: The Contractor shall be held responsible for replacing
or reconstructing in kind, any damaged property that result from construction activities
including, but not limited to, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, Portland Cement concrete and
asphaltic concrete pavement, grass, drainage structures and irrigation systems. The new
work shall be restored to its original and serviceable condition satisfactory to the City
Engineer. Whenever a part of a square or slab of existing concrete sidewalk, driveway
or pavement is broken or damaged, the entire square or slab shall be removed and
reconstructed at the expense of the Contractor.
N. Traffic Control: All traffic control used on the project should conform to the latest edition of
the MUTCD. The Contractor shall maintain reasonable access to and from properties
adjacent to the project at all times throughout the project duration. If a traffic control plan is
not included in the plans for the project, the following will apply:
1. All lanes of traffic in all directions shall be maintained during non-working hours. The
Contractor may, with authorization of the City Project Engineer, close such traffic lanes
during non-peak traffic hours, as approved, using traffic cones, portable barricades, or
any other traffic control devices the City Engineer may designate.
2. No work shall be allowed that will in any way restrict traffic between the hours of 7 AM
to 8:30 AM or 4 PM to 6 PM at the project location(s).
3. Proper traffic control signing and protective devices shall be positioned by the
Contractor prior to beginning construction activities each day. The Contractor shall
patrol the work area as frequently as needed during the day and at the end of the
working day. All traffic cones, signs, barricades, drums, and other devices accidentally
moved during construction shall be immediately reset to their proper condition.

PART 4 SUREMENT AND PAYMENT

METHODS OF MEASUREMENT
The street light installation as indicated on the plans, complete-in-place and accepted, will be
measured as a unit lump sum quantity for all work necessary.

BASIS OF PAYMENT
The street light installation measured as provided above will be paid for at the contract lump
sum price bid.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 14


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

END OF SECTION

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4505 - 15


Section 4505 Streetlights 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4500 TRAFFIC DEVICES

SECTION 4510 – TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment for the installation and
testing of the traffic signal installation as shown on the plans and as indicated in the following
specifications, or as directed by the City Engineer. All incidental parts which are not shown
on the plans or specified herein and which are necessary to complete traffic signal system
shall be furnished and installed as though such parts were shown on the plans referenced herein.
All systems shall be complete and in operation to the satisfaction of the City Engineer at the time
of acceptance of work.

1.2 ADMINISTRATION
A. Materials: A complete list of pre-approved traffic signal materials can be found in the
Design and Construction Manual (SDCM) located on the Department page of the City of
Shawnee’s website at: www.cityofshawnee.org or by contacting the Public Works
Department.
B. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements of these Specifications and the
Construction Documents, all material and work shall conform to the latest requirements of
the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), the
standards of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) and the American
Standards Associations (ASA), and local ordinances. All electrical equipment shall also
conform to the standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Concrete shall conform to the
Kansas City Metro Materials Board (KCMMB).
All references in these specifications or in the Special Provisions to the standards
mentioned above shall be construed to mean the standard that is in effect at the date of
advertising of these specifications.
C. Permits: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining an electrical service permit from the
City’s Codes Administration Division before any excavation for the control center foundation
or the service feed takes place. The Contractor shall contact the City’s Codes
Administration Division for an electrical inspection when the control center is ready.
The Contractor is responsible for obtaining such permits and approvals as may be required
by the appropriate electrical utility company and is responsible for all costs associated with
extending electrical power from the service point to the control center whatever the distance.
The Contractor shall notify the appropriate electrical utility company ahead of when the
system needs to be energized.
The Transportation Manager will assign an address for the control center, which the
Contractor shall use when obtaining permits and when dealing with the electrical utility
company.

The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department once project work begins including;
trenching and pole installations and to request final project inspections. The Contractor shall

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 1


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

keep the City Engineer apprised as to the progress of the project and the Contractor’s proposed
schedule. The Inspector or City Engineer may, at their discretion, mandate any work completed
without their knowledge or inspection to be dismantled and inspected to their satisfaction.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. KDOT Standard Specification:
1. Section 814 – Electrical Lighting Systems and Traffic Signals
2. Section 1703 – Electrical Lighting and Traffic Signal Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS
Before commencing the installation of any material or equipment, the Contractor shall submit
one electronic copy of complete shop drawings for manufactured materials and equipment to
the Engineer for approval in pdf format. Manufacturers’ bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive
data that contain cuts, dimensions, specifications and wiring diagrams will be acceptable for
standard cataloged equipment. Such bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive data shall be clearly
marked to show the item to be used to satisfy a required item in the schedule of materials shown
on the Plans, or as specified in the Special Provisions. Shop Drawings should be certified by
the manufacturer to be in conformance with the project plans and specifications including
conformance with all material specifications. The City Engineer may require other descriptive
data, drawings, and diagrams for non-cataloged equipment or materials. In the event any items
of material or equipment contained on the shop drawings fail to comply with the specification
requirements, such items may be rejected by the City Engineer. Orders for material and
equipment shall not be placed until written approval is obtained from the City Engineer.
All submittals shall include the manufacturer brand name and part number where applicable.
Where more than one item is present on a submittal sheet, the appropriate item or items shall
be circled, not highlighted. All submittals shall be organized as much as practical in order with
the summary of quantities sheet in the plans. New submittals on rejected items shall be
supplied to the Engineer for approval. If shop drawings are required to be submitted as a result
of proposed field modifications of a structure, a registered Professional Engineer shall seal those
shop drawings prior to submittal to the City.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise noted in the plans, all equipment, materials and incidental parts shall be new
and of similar manufacturer. The cost of incidental materials not mentioned in the Plans shall
be included in the traffic signal installation lump sum bid price.
A. Concrete: All concrete supplied for the work shall be a KCMMB4k mix. Concrete placement
shall be in compliance with Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Signal Poles: Traffic Signal Poles shall conform to these Specifications, the plans and the
latest edition of AASHTO’s Standard Specifications “For Structural Supports For Signs,
Luminaires and Traffic Signals.” The pole and arm shall be a round, tapered monotube
made only of one length of the best grade, structural steel sheet of not less than 7
Manufacturing Standard Gauge. Only one longitudinal weld and no transverse welds shall
be permitted in the fabrication of the shaft or arm.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 2


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

The steel anchor base of adequate strength, shape and size shall be secured to the lower
end of the shaft by welding in such manner as to develop the full strength of the adjacent
shaft section to resist bending action.

The steel poles shall be galvanized to ASTM A-123 standards. All accessories shall be
galvanized to ASTM A-153 standards. The tapered steel shaft shall include high strength
anchor bolts and nuts that meet the following requirements:

Tensile Strength, min. psi (min. kPa) 75,000 (517,125)


Yield Strength at 0.2% offset, min. psi (min. kPa) 55,000 (379,225)
Elongation in 8” (205 mm), min. 18%
or 2” (50 mm), min. 21%

The anchor bolts shall be hot dipped galvanized on the threaded end after threading. The
galvanizing shall include all threads and not less than six inches (150 mm) of the adjacent
unthreaded portion of the bolts. Anchor bolts shall be threaded to a length shown on the
plans or in the Standard Details. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series as specified in
ANSI B1.1 and may be formed by cutting or rolling. Nuts for anchor bolts shall be Heavy
Hex leveling nuts and Heavy Hex nuts as specified in ANSI B18.2.2. Nuts shall comply with
the proof load or Brinell hardness requirements of ASTM A307. After galvanizing, the
thread fit of the bolt-nut combination shall be snug and shall be such that the nuts can be
turned on the bolts without the application of excessive torque. The City Engineer may
conduct proof load tests on the bolt-nut combination to check the thread fit.
The pole shaft shall also include a handhole and cover, cast pole top, a J-hook wire
support, and a suitable bolt-on type device for attaching the mast arm to the shaft as shown
on the Traffic Signal Detail sheets in the accompanying plans. The tapered steel arm shall
include a removable end cap.
Where a combination lighting/signal pole is specified on the plans, the above applies with
the luminaire arm to be mounted in the same vertical plane as the signal arm (except where
otherwise noted on the plans). The vertical shaft of the combination lighting/signal pole
shall be a one-piece design and shall contain an additional handhole located 4 inches (102
mm) above the mast arm on the opposite side of the pole from the mast arm.
When fully loaded with all equipment as shown on the plans, all mast arms shall be
between horizontal (level) to one and one-half degrees (1-1/2°) above horizontal. No
perceptible bending of the arm shall be observed when fully loaded, as determined by a
visual inspection by the Engineer. All traffic signal poles shall be detailed on shop drawings
by the manufacturer indicating pole and arm dimensions and attachment method along with
signal weight, projected areas, and type of mounting that it is designed to accommodate.
C. Aluminum Pedestals: Pedestals shall consist of aluminum, die cast or sand cast square
base and a 4-inch (100 mm) diameter shaft for mounting vertical signal heads or a standard
controller cabinet. The pedestal shall be capable of withstanding wind loadings of 100 mph
(160 kph).

The cast aluminum bases shall meet the requirements of ASTM B108 Alloy 356-T6, ASTM
B-26, SG70A-T6, S5A.F, or ASTM B-108, SG70A-T6. The base and post shall be joined by
threaded connections. Welded connections will not be accepted. The threaded post shall
be easily and fully screwed into the threaded pedestal base without lubricant and be

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 3


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

secured to the base by means of a threaded set screw. The aluminum shaft shall be spun
from one piece of seamless tubing, meeting the requirements of ASTM B210 and having a
minimum nominal 0.125-inch (3.2 mm) wall thickness. The shaft shall have no longitudinal
welds, nor circumferential welds. The shaft shall have a uniform polished finish. Each shaft
shall be tire-wrapped with a heavy water-resistant paper for protection during shipment and
installation
D. Vehicle Signal Heads: Each vehicle signal head shall be a weather-tight assembly of the
expansible, adjustable, LED type, together with all brackets and fittings necessary for
proper mounting of the signal faces and sizes shown on the plans. All brackets and fittings
necessary for proper mounting with the type of signal support designated on the plans shall
be furnished. Each signal face shall consist of one or more signal sections, rigidly and
securely fastened together, capable of being positively positioned to control the movement
of one direction of traffic. Each signal section shall be a self-contained assembly consisting
of an optical unit with housing, housing door, and visor. Tie rods shall not be used to fasten
signal sections together to form a signal face. All signal heads on a project shall be the
product of one manufacturer and shall be a single model number for like items. For signal
modification projects, new signal heads shall match existing signal heads with respect to
manufacturer and model. Terminal blocks of suitable size shall be placed in the middle
section of the signal head.
The housing for each signal section shall be made of a durable polycarbonate and shall be
yellow in color. It shall be clean, smooth and free from cracks, flaws, blowholes, and other
imperfections. It shall be designed as a self-contained unit capable of separate mounting or
inclusion in a signal face containing two or more signal sections securely fastened together.
It shall be equipped with round openings in the top and bottom so that it may be rotated
between waterproof supporting brackets and thus be capable of being directed at any angle
in the horizontal plane. It shall be equipped with positive locking devices to maintain a
specific angle of direction when in place. The doors shall be black in color and consist of
polycarbonate construction. They shall be suitably hinged and held securely to the body of
the housing by simple stainless steel locking devices. All other door parts, such as hinge
pins, lens clips, screws, etc., shall also be of stainless steel material. Neoprene gasketing
shall be used between the lenses and reflectors to exclude dust and moisture.
The visors for each signal section shall be durable polycarbonate, black in color, not less
than 0.05 inches (1.25 mm) in thickness and shall be tunnel-type. It shall be designed to fit
tightly against the door, and shall not permit any perceptible filtration of light between it and
the housing door. Visors shall be at least 9.5 inches (240 mm) long for 12-inch (300 mm)
diameter signals and shall angle slightly downward.
The optical unit and visor shall be designed as a whole so as to eliminate the return of
outside rays entering the unit from above the horizontal.
Lenses shall meet the requirements of ANSI D-10.1-1966 optical specifications and shall be
glass for incandescent style. Lettering shall not appear on lenses. Nominal 12-inch (300
mm) diameter signal LED’s shall be furnished, unless otherwise shown on the accompanying
plans.
All traffic signal indications for new signal installations as well as signal modification projects
shall be LED displays. LED indications shall be 12-inch (300 mm) diameter, 120- volt LED’s
in a self-contained enclosure with a 10-year life expectancy. LED indications shall comply
with the latest edition of ITE’s Interim Purchase Specification – Vehicle Traffic Signal Control
Heads, Part 2: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Traffic Signal Modules.
E. Pedestrian Signal Heads: The construction materials and colors for pedestrian signal
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 4
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

heads shall conform to those listed in the previous section with the following additions
outlined below.
Pedestrian signal heads shall be 16”x18” and shall have an eggshell cover. The LED
module shall display a Portland orange hand and lunar white man and two Portland
orange countdown numbers. . Pedestrian symbols shall be a minimum of 9 inches (230
mm) high for 12-inch (300 mm) lenses. LED indications shall comply with the latest edition
of ITE’s Interim Purchase Specification – Vehicle Traffic Signal Control Heads, Part 2: Light
Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Traffic Signal Modules. The legends shall conform to the
ITE Specification Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications. All lenses shall be 12 inches
(300 mm) unless indicated otherwise in the accompanying plans.
The pedestrian signal door and visor shall be black in color. All 12-inch (300 mm) pedestrian
signals shall have 9-inch to 9.75-inch (230 mm to 250 mm) tunnel visors. All visors shall
be a minimum of 0.06 inches (1.5 mm) thick.
The pedestrian and countdown indications shall be 120-volt LEDs in self-contained
enclosures and shall have a 10-year life expectancy.
F. Signal Head Mounting: Vertical bracket mounted signal heads, as shown on the plans,
shall be supported by a one-piece mounting bracket watertight assembly made entirely of a
durable polycarbonate and be yellow in color. Each bracket shall be either plumb or level,
symmetrically arranged and securely assembled. Each bracket shall have serrations for
positioning traffic signals in increments of 5º. Construction shall be such that conductors
are concealed within the assembly. Brackets shall be attached to the pole or pedestal by
approved stainless steel banding and brackets.
Mast arm signal head assemblies shall be rigid mounted utilizing a universally adjustable
bracket consisting of both top and bottom brackets with a center vertical extruded aluminum
support tube attached to the mast arm by means of a clamp kit with stainless steel cable.
The vertical support tube shall allow wire entry at any point and be equipped with a vinyl
insert that conceals the wiring. The vertical support shall not extend more than 3 inches
beyond the horizontal bracket. The lower bracket arm shall be hollow for wiring entry into
the signal head.
G. Signal Backplates: Where shown on the plans, 5-inch (125 mm), one-piece backplates
shall be furnished and attached to the signal section to provide a dark background for signal
indications. Any connection to the top of any signal section shall be watertight. Backplates
shall be attached to the signals with stainless steel bolts, nuts and flat washers, or as per
the manufacturer's recommended practice. Bolt lengths shall be selected to not interfere
with maintenance operations.
H. Pedestrian Push Buttons: All push buttons shall be Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS),
and meet the most current guidelines prescribed by the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), MUTCD and Public Rights of Way Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG). APS
systems shall have a direct push contact type pushbutton with a raised directional arrow,
rated for a maximum operating force of 3.0 lbs, and a switch operating life rated greater
than 20 million operations. The system shall be capable of high quality digital audio
messaging (2% total harmonic distortion plus noise @ 1 kHz) with automatic volume
adjustment to ambient noise levels (Max. volume of 100 dB at 1m) as well as vibro-tactile
walk phase indication.
I. Electrical Cable: All electrical cable required by the plans shall be new and meet the
following specifications:
1. Multi-Conductor Signal Cables: Multi-conductor signal cables shall conform to

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 5


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Specification 19-1 of the latest edition of the International Municipal Signal Association,
Inc. (IMSA) requirements, except all conductors supplied shall be stranded copper with
a minimum size of No. 14 AWG. All conductor cables shall be rated for a 600 volt
maximum system. The number and size of conductors per cable shall be as shown on
the plans.
Conductors shall be stranded, annealed coated copper. Copper wire, before insulating
or stranding, shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of ASTM B-33 (for coated
wire). Stranding shall be Class B, in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM B-8.
Insulation for the individual conductors shall consist of 20 mil thickness of polyethylene,
and an insulation covering a polyvinyl chloride compound with a 10 mil thickness. The
polyethylene insulation shall meet the requirements of paragraph 3.9 of IPCEA
standards S-61-402 before application to the conductor, and paragraph 3.9.1 after
application to the conductor. The polyvinyl chloride insulation covering shall meet the
requirements of paragraph 4.3.1 of IPCEA standards S-61-402, and shall be color
coded in accordance with method 1 or 3, part 5 of IPCEA standard S-61-402.
The overall cable jacket shall consist of a polyvinyl chloride compound which will
provide a tough, heat, moisture, ozone, and flame resistant covering meeting the
requirements of paragraph 4.3.1 of IPCEA standard S-61-402. The overall jacket
thickness shall be in accordance with Table 18, part 4, IPCEA standard S-61-402. As
an acceptable alternate, the Contractor may use multi-conductor, stranded, cable
meeting the requirements of International Municipal Signal Association, Inc.
Specification 19-1 (1967) for Polyethylene-Insulated, Polyvinyl Chloride Jacketed
Signal Cable.
2. Power Lead-In Cables: Power lead-in cables shall be of the sizes and number of
conductors as shown on the plans. The power lead-in cable shall be for operation on a
600 volt maximum and suitable for use at conductor temperatures not exceeding 75°
C. Material, construction, and tests shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of the IPCEA Standard S-66-524 "Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-
Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Energy."
Conductors shall be stranded, annealed coated copper. Copper wire, before insulating
or stranding, shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of ASTM B-33 (for coated
wire). Stranding shall be Class B, in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM B-8.
Insulation for power lead-in cable shall consist of cross-linked thermosetting
polyethylene, meeting the requirements of column B of IPCEA and listed by UL as
Type USE RHW-75 ° C.
3. Detector Lead-in Cables: Detector lead-in cables shall be 2 conductor #14 stranded
and shielded cable. The conductor and drain wires shall be tinned copper wires with
conductors shielded by a layer of aluminized polyester. All wires shall be insulated
with cross-linked polypropylene or polyethylene and provided with a vinyl jacket.
4. Detector Loop Wires: Detector loop wires shall be No. 14 AWG, stranded copper,
conforming to IMSA Specification 51-5 (Single conductor PVC/Nylon with tube jacket).
Sealant for loop detectors shall be prepared and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's instructions
to the Engineer for review and approval. Regardless of the manufacturer’s instructions,
the sealant shall be squeegeed into the saw cuts. All curb cuts shall be sealed with
duct seal.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 6


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

J. Service Enclosure: The service enclosure shall be a combination meter socket breaker
box, raintight enclosure equipped with a 100-amp main breaker and a 50-amp traffic signal
breaker to be operated at 120 volts AC. The unit shall be capable of receiving 120/240 volt
AC electrical line service. The unit shall be equipped with separate lockable compartments
for the meter socket and the breaker box. Corbin locks shall be installed for parts of the
enclosure that are accessed by the City. The unit shall be UL listed and the enclosure shall
have a natural aluminum finish. Service enclosures shall also conform to the latest
requirements of the local utility. All traffic signals shall have a battery back-up system from
the Shawnee Traffic Signal Approved Products List, or approved equal
In addition to the requirements above, the service enclosure shall be equipped with a 120-
volt, 30-amp street light circuit breaker, photocell and mercury contactor, test switch and
appropriate terminal blocks for street light circuit connection when street lights or LED
overhead street name signs are powered through the signal controller. The enclosure shall
be specified on the Plans as Type MET2-VLM-LTS, or approved equal.
K. Service Boxes: All service boxes shall be fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete boxes of
the size and shape as shown on the Standard Detail sheet in the accompanying plans.
Service box material shall be an aggregate consisting of sand and gravel bound together
with a polymer and reinforced with continuous woven glass strands. The material must
have the following mechanical properties:

Compressive Strength 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa)


Tensile Strength 1,700 psi (11,722 kPa)
Flexural Strength 7,500 psi (51,713 kPa)

Service boxes with adjustable top ring may be permitted if approved by the Engineer.
Junction boxes shall be either Type I or Type II as shown on the plans and shall be
fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete of a size and shape as indicated on the Standard
Detail sheet in the accompanying plans. Junction box material to be an aggregate consisting
of sand and gravel bound together with a polymer and reinforced with continuous woven glass
strands. The material must have the following mechanical properties:

Compressive Strength 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa)


Tensile Strength 1,700 psi (11,722 kPa)
Flexural Strength 7,500 psi (51,713 kPa)

Covers for service and junction boxes to be used for traffic signals, or a combination of
traffic signals and street lighting, shall be embossed with “TRAFFIC SIGNALS”. Covers for
pull boxes to be used for fiber optics shall be embossed with “FIBER OPTICS”.
L. Signal Controller and Cabinet: The actuated controller shall be a Cobalt RackMount
manufactured by Econolite, or approved equal, and shall include the current firmware that is
compatible with Operation Green Light (OGL). Licensure of the program shall be included
and made part of the controller unit in the name of the City of Shawnee, Kansas.
Cabinet: Cabinets shall be a Model 332D equipped with the appropriate number of the
following equipment to allow for the traffic signal operation as shown in the accompanying
plans:
(a) Model 200 switch pack

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 7


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

(b) Model 204 flasher


(c) Model 420 flash transfer relay
(d) Model 242 two-channel isolator
(e) Radar or Loop Detectors
(f) Model 2010P conflict monitor
(g) Hubble Generator Outlet (HBL360P4W)

(h) Transfer switch (model provided by City)

The cabinet shall be equipped with a combined power supply and power distribution
assembly (PDA #2). The output file back panel shall be hardwired instead of printed circuit
board. The flasher program plug shall be accessible without dropping the output file back
panel.
A red monitor board assembly shall be attached to the rear panel of the output file. A 20-
conductor cable assembly for monitoring the red outputs of all signal load switches shall be
provided and attached to the red monitor board assembly. The cable is to be routed to the
front of the output file and plugged into the connector provided in the front of the conflict
monitor.
A means of selecting the active red monitor channel shall be provided on the red monitor
board assembly. Selection is accomplished by a two-position jumper (shunt) with the
center position wired to a red monitor input and a select of 115 VAC to the right and the red
load switch output to the left. Moving the jumper to the right will provide a continuous red
input and override, while moving the jumper to the left will attach the monitor channel to the
corresponding load switch output. The jumper assembly shall be accessible while the
intersection is in operation. Twelve (12) selectors shall be provided; eight phase selections
and four overlap selections.
A pull-out, lighted, hinged-top drawer having sliding tracks with lockout and quick-
disconnect features, shall be provided as shown in the cabinet drawings. The pull-out
drawer shall extend a minimum of 14 inches (355 mm) in order to facilitate removal of the
processor by providing the processor with an aluminum platform covered by a Formica-
type, chemical-proof plastic sheet while the rear connector is being removed. It shall be
possible to lift this hinged platform in order to gain access to the interior of the drawer.
Minimum interior dimensions of the drawer shall be 1 inch (25 mm) high, 13 inches (330
mm) deep, and 16 inches (405mm) wide. The drawer shall be capable of supporting a 40-
pound (18 kg) controller when fully extended. The drawer shall be placed in a manner where
the top can be opened completely without obstruction from cabinet wiring or any other
obstruction.
The Actuated Controller Operating Software shall be the latest version of Cobalt firmware,
as specified on the City’s pre-approved list of materials, and shall already be programmed
in the Controller. Licensure of the program shall be included and made part of the controller
unit in the name of the City of Shawnee, Kansas.
The cabinet and doors shall be fabricated from 0.125-inch (3.2mm) minimum thickness
unpainted aluminum. The cabinet shall be supplied with CORBIN #2 locks. Two 15-watt
fluorescent light fixtures and bulbs shall be provided one each near the top front and back
of the cabinet. The light shall be activated by an automatic switch. The light fixture shall
have a cold weather type ballast. The cabinet shall be provided with lightning protection on
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 8
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

the power input. The cabinet shall include a Edco SHA 1250-BASE-A surge suppressor and
base.
Conflict Monitor: Conflict monitors shall be Reno model 2018. In addition to the standard
specifications, the conflict monitor shall be capable of monitoring the red signal outputs as
described below:

(a) Any dark signal head (that is loss of signal output to field terminals) shall cause the
monitor to trip.
(b) The green, yellow and red indications for each phase shall be brought into the
monitor individually and shall be monitored separately with respect to a loss of signal
on any of the three (3) inputs per channel.
(c) The monitor shall have the required circuitry to allow the early detection of a conflict
caused by a green or yellow signal "hang up" (that is any green or yellow output
which shall remain on when the controller has transferred to a yellow or all red output
respectively) by starting the fault timers as soon as a yellow appears with the
corresponding green still energized. The monitor shall not wait until a conflicting
green is displayed to time the conflict. This shall preclude the presentation of a
conflicting signal display at the intersection.
(d) During the "All Red" clearance period, the monitor shall check all inputs for faulty
signal display and shall react to these faulty indications during the all red clearance
period. Since the only inputs that should be active during this period would be the
reds, the monitor shall detect any faults such as red/green, red/yellow, green/yellow
and green/red/yellow.
(e) The monitor shall be capable of monitoring for incorrect signal applied at the field
terminals of each vehicular movement (green, yellow, red). Should a voltage be
present on more than one, or none, of the inputs (green, yellow, red) of a channel,
the unit shall begin timing the duration of this condition. If this condition exists for
less than 700 milliseconds, the unit shall not trigger. If this condition exists for 1,000
milliseconds or more, the unit shall trigger. If this condition exists for 700
milliseconds or more, but less than 1,000 milliseconds, the unit may or may not
trigger.
(f) When the unit triggers, it shall cause the output relay contacts to transfer. These
contacts shall remain in this state until the unit is reset by the activation of the panel
control or the activation of the external reset input. Power interruption shall not reset
the conflict monitor when it has been triggered by detection of a faulty load switch
output.
(g) The monitor shall be compatible with LED and flashing yellow arrow technology.
(h) The minimum indicators shall be as follows:
(i) Power: shall be illuminated when the +24 VDC input from the controller is
present and AC+ is applied to the monitor.
(ii) Watch Dog Error: shall illuminate when the monitor detects a watch dog
error, and shall be a 1.5 second watch dog circuit.
(iii) Conflict: shall illuminate when a conflict has been detected by the monitor.
(iv) Red Failure: shall illuminate when a red failure has been detected by the
monitor.
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 9
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

(v) Switch Fail: shall illuminate when a faulty load switch has been detected by
the monitor.
(vi) PCA: shall illuminate when the program board is not installed or not
installed properly.
(vii) PIAF: shall illuminate when the unit has detected a failure, then
experiences a power interruption.
(viii) The monitor shall include signal status indicators. These indicators (one
per channel) shall illuminate when a signal is present on the corresponding
channel during normal operation. If the unit trips due to a conflict, the
signal status shall lock up, displaying the status of each channel at the time
the conflict occurred. Should the monitor trip due to the absence of red or a
faulty load switch output, the signal status indicators shall display the channel
(channels) which is (are) at fault. If the monitor detects a load switch fault
condition, the switch failure indicator shall be illuminated on and the signal
status indicators will display the exact channel of the load switch that failed.
The red inputs shall be brought into the monitor via a front panel connector.
The Red Enable shall be brought into the monitor via the same front panel
connector as the red inputs.
(ix) The monitor shall be compatible with LED technology.
M. Conduit: The size of the conduit used shall be as shown on the plans. It shall be the
privilege of the Contractor, at his own expense, to use larger size conduit if desired. Where
larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of the run from outlet to outlet.
No reducing couplings will be permitted.
All conduit used for traffic signal installations shall be either metallic conduit, Schedule 40 or
80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, or Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 high density
polyethylene (HDPE) conduit as indicated on the plans. Conduit runs under the roadway
shall use Schedule 80 conduit.
1. Metallic Conduit: Metallic Conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit meeting the
requirements of American Standard Specifications C-80-1. Metallic conduit is only
approved for extension of existing metallic conduit runs, or where otherwise shown on
the plans.
2. PVC Conduit: PVC conduit shall bear an Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) label.
3. HDPE Conduit: HDPE conduit shall be smooth-walled inside and out. The conduit
shall be manufactured to ASTM D2447 and NEMA TC7 specifications and shall meet
the following applicable requirements:

Minimum Wall Thickness: 3" (75 mm) Sch. 40 - 0.216" (5.5 mm)
Tensile Strength 3300 psi (22.75 Mpa) ASTM D-638
Elongation 800 % ASTM D-638
Density 0.955 g/cm3 ASTMD-1505
Melt Index 0.320 gms/10 min. ASTM D-1238(E)
Brittle Temp <-103º F (<-75º C) ASTM D-746
ESCR (Bell Test) >1500 F50 hrs. ASTM D-1693(C)
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 10
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Rockwell Hardness L 49 ASTM D-785


Shore Hardness D 61 ASTM D-2240

N. Emergency Preemption: The Contractor shall furnish and install Opticom emergency
preemption equipment as shown in the plans and as specified in the Traffic Signal
Quantities. The cable shall be run continuous from the detector to the controller cabinet
with no splices. The detector shall be installed as shown in the plans or by a method
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper alignment of
the detector to ensure maximum detection time for the emergency preemption equipment.
The Opticom equipment shall be programmable to restrict use by unauthorized users. Two-
channel opticom cards shall be used.
O. Detection Systems (Radar): Where specified in the plans, a microwave (radar) advance
detection system shall be installed, and manufactured by Wavetronix or an approved equal.
The radar advance detection unit shall be enclosed in a Lexan polycarbonate material and
resistant to corrosion, fungus, moisture deterioration and ultraviolet rays, meeting NEMA
250 Standards. The unit shall have a voltage supply ranging from 9 – 28 VDC and
onboard surge protection. The detection accuracy of large vehicles and of all motor vehicles
shall be 98% and 90%, respectively. The radar operating frequency shall be in the range of
10.5 – 10.55 GHz (X-band) with a bandwidth stability within 1%. Eight (8) RF channels
shall be included on the unit with a transmit bandwidth of 45 MHz. Testing of the unit shall
meet NEMA TS 2-1998 standards.

P. Street Lighting: All lighting equipment including, but not limited to luminaires, lamps and
poles shall conform to the City of Shawnee’s Street Lighting Design Criteria and Plan
Requirements as well as the Specifications. Luminaires mounted on traffic signal poles
shall be Class C or D (250W or 150W HPS Equivalent) LED Cobra Heads capable of
operating at a voltage of 120VAC. The photocell on the Meyers MET2-VLM- LTS, or
approved equal service enclosure, shall be utilized for proper operation of the street lights.
Q. Traffic Signing: All permanent traffic signing and traffic control signing shall conform to
the requirements of the MUTCD. All signs shall be fabricated from standard aluminum
blanks utilizing high intensity reflective sheeting with the exception of LED overhead street
name signs. Overhead street name signs shall be provided and installed on all mast arm
poles and shall be either LED-illuminated overhead street name signs or constructed of
0.125-inch (3.2mm) aluminum sheeting, as indicated on the plans. Minimum size
requirements for any sign shall be 24" x 60" (600 mm x 1500 mm).
All aluminum sheeting sign legends shall contain an initial uppercase letter followed by
lowercase lettering and shall be 12-inch (300 mm) series E lettering or numbers and shall
be white in color, unless otherwise specified on the plans. All signs shall have a white 0.75-
inch (19 mm) wide border and shall have green backgrounds. All signs shall have the
legends centered on the face with the letters or numbers spaced to produce a readable,
professional quality sign. Actual size drawings of the proposed signs shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
All LED overhead street name signs shall have a white border and a green background.
The sign fixture shall be designed and constructed to prevent deformation or failure when
subject to wind loads in conformance with the requirements of the AASHTO publication,
Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals,
and any associated amendments. LED-illuminated sign materials furnished by the
manufacturer/vendor/contractor shall be in accordance with the NEC and shall conform to

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 11


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

the following requirements. The manufacturer shall supply shop drawings submittals for the
fixtures, sign, sign message and mounting hardware. The sign frame/housing shall be
formed and manufactured out of extruded aluminum alloy with a minimum tensile strength
of 20,000 ksi. The sign frame shall be painted flat black with a durable powder coat
process. The sign frame/housing shall incorporate stainless steel fasteners provided at all
the corners of the signs panel frame to secure the sign in the closed position. Weep holes
shall be located at strategic points at the bottom of the housing to allow drainage of any
condensation. The design of the housing shall afford provisions for continuous gasketing
between housing and sign frame members to resist entrance of moisture, dirt, and other
undesirable debris. Gaskets between sign panel frame and panel shall be enclosed cell
neoprene rubber installed in the frame channel to prevent the gasket from moving or
slipping out of position. The sign panel shall be slide-mounted in the frame, as shown on
the plans. The entire surface of the sign panel shall provide a letter to background
brightness ratio, which is adequate for nighttime legibility. The sign panels shall be
translucent panels of high impact and UV resistant plastic/acrylic materials. All surfaces
shall be free from blemishes that may detract from the general appearance and color of the
sign.
The LED-illuminated sign light source shall be comprised of white LEDs projecting light into
the border of an optically coupled light panel. The light panel redirects the light to create a
uniform illuminated plane. Each sign shall use combinations of 12” x 1” printed circuit
boards which incorporate 20, 25, or 30 white InGAN 5mm “ULTRA BRIGHT: LEDs. For
each linear foot of sign, a combination of one top and one bottom printed circuit board
format shall be used. Each board shall be replaceable and interconnected by locking male
and female dual pin connectors. The operational life of the LEDs shall be a minimum of 10
years at 50% duty cycle. Font E Mod 2k. 8” lettering.
The LED-illuminated sign shall be powered by 120 VAC. The photocell on the Meyers
MET2-VLM-LTS, or approved equal service enclosure shall be used for the LED overhead
street name signs. The manufacturer shall warranty workmanship and defects of the LED-
illuminated sign under this specification for a period of five years. All wiring connections
within the sign fixture shall terminate through a UL approved junction box. All conductors
inside the sign fixture and on the load side of the power shall be UL listed appliance
material (AWM) stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation. All printed circuit boards
shall be conformably coated for moisture resistance. The sign shall incorporate over-current
protection through the use of an in-line fuse. The fuse rating and type shall be appropriate
for varying size and power configurations.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans or required in this specification, all fasteners and
screws in or on the fixture shall be stainless steel type 302 or 305, brass or aluminum. All
steel nuts, bolts and hardware for sign attachment shall be stainless steel type 303 or 305.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notification: The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department prior to
construction to set up a pre-construction meeting in the field.
B. Schedule: Before commencing the installation of the traffic signal installation, a complete
schedule of materials and equipment proposed for installation shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. This schedule shall include catalog cuts, diagrams, drawings, and
other such descriptive data that may be required by the Engineer.
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 12
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

C. Pre-Construction Meeting: A pre-construction conference shall be held with the Contractor


and the City Engineer as directed by the City Engineer. During this meeting, a copy of
the City’s most current pre-approved list shall be furnished to the Contractor. At the earliest
possible time all electrical conduit, service boxes, pole foundations and junction boxes shall
be installed at the correct grade.
D. Signal Heads: Traffic signal heads shall remain covered with orange bags during
construction until the entire installation is placed in operation. Black bags shall not be used
to cover the new signal heads during construction. Signal heads are to be covered to
convey to drivers that they are not operational, as approved by the City Project Engineer.
E. Utilities: No new fixture shall be constructed as part of this contract which is in conflict with
any existing utility facility, or the code required thereby, unless approved by the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Existing Traffic Signals: The vehicle detection system shall be maintained by the contractor
throughout the project and shall be fully operational and functional at all times except for
a short time period while the existing signal is switched over to the new signal.
B. Service and Junction Boxes: Service and junction boxes shall be installed as shown on
the plans and on the Standard Detail sheets and at such additional points as the Contractor,
at his own expense and with the approval of the Engineer, may desire to facilitate the
work. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all service and junction boxes shall be
installed level to 1 inch (25 mm) above the finish grade.
Boxes subject to traffic (located in the street) have been denoted “traffic-rated junction box”
on the plans and shall be installed by the Contractor at his expense.
C. Excavation: The Contractor shall perform all excavations for installing underground
conduits, cable, boxes and pole bases in whatever substances encountered, to the depths
indicated on the drawings or as approved. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling
shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the excavation to avoid slides.
Excavated materials shall be kept off sidewalks and out of the street where possible. The
Contractor shall pile excavated materials such that drivers' visibility will not be obstructed.
All excavated materials not required or unsuitable for backfill shall be removed and
wasted on a site obtained by the Contractor. Excavations and trenches shall not be larger
or wider than necessary for the proper installation of the foundations or electrical
appliance. Excavation shall not be performed until immediately before the installation of
conduit, bases or other appliances. All excess excavated material shall be removed at the
earliest possible time, by the end of the same working day, or as directed by the City Engineer.
All areas excavated shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with these
Specifications. Backfill shall be deposited in not over 6 inch (150 mm) layers and tamped to
95 percent density +3 percent of optimum moisture. The top 6 inches (150 mm) of backfill
shall be select soil suitable for sod. All areas excavated shall be backfilled at the earliest
possible time or as directed by the Engineer. After backfilling, all disturbed areas shall be
kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and well drained condition until permanent
repairs are made. Where trenches are excavated in established sod areas, the area shall
be backfilled the same day excavation occurs. Approved methods are intended to reduce
damage to the established sod area.
D. Concrete Foundations: The bottom of the concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground;
foundations shall be poured monolithic except the top 6-inch (150 mm) pole cap. The
exposed portions shall be formed to present a neat appearance. Forms shall be true to line
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 13
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

and grade. The top of concrete foundation pole caps, except special foundations, shall be
finished to either sidewalk grade, 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade where there is no
sidewalk, or as directed by the City Engineer. Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in
place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in proper position, to proper
heights, and held in place by means of a template until the concrete sets. Each anchor
bolt shall be provided with 2 hex head nut and 2 flat washers. Both forms and ground
which will contact the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened before placing concrete. All
conduits shall be securely covered prior to pouring concrete. All threaded portions of
anchor bolts shall be taped during the concrete pour. Any concrete splashed on poles when
pouring the pole cap shall be immediately cleaned off.
Duct sealant shall be used to create a water tight seam between the controller cabinet and
the top of the concrete controller pad foundation.
E. Wiring: Installation of wiring shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications and
appropriate articles of the National Electrical Code. In addition, allowable pulling tensions
on wiring in conduits shall be as per the cable manufacturer’s recommendations. Approved
pulling lubricants shall be used when pulling wiring in conduits. No splicing of cables will be
permitted unless shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer. Where splices are
allowed, they shall be made by a method approved by the Engineer. Wire nuts shall be
used in the base of any signal pole for wire connections. Where practical, color codes shall
be followed so that the red insulated conductor connects to the red indication terminal,
orange to yellow, green to green and white to neutral. In addition, signal cable shall be
tagged with the associated phase numbers.

Cable Run Code

Northbound Traffic Phase 6

Southbound Traffic Phase 6

Eastbound Traffic Phase 6

Westbound Traffic Phase 2

Northbound Left-Turning Traffic Phase 7

Southbound Left-Turning Traffic Phase 3

Eastbound Left-Turning Traffic Phase 1

Westbound Left-Turning Traffic Phase 5

A minimum of one (1) turn of each cable shall be left in every service or junction box for
slack. In addition, slack shall be left in all poles and the controller cabinet. All slack cable
shall be neatly dressed using nylon cable ties.
F. Bonding and Grounding: Bonding jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG bare copper wire or
equally connected by approved clamps. Grounding of neutral at service point shall be
accomplished as required by the National Electric Safety Code, except bonding jumpers
shall be No. 6 AWG or equal. Ground electrodes shall be provided at each signal pole and
pedestal and at the controller as detailed on the plans. The controller requires an equipment

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 14


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

ground as indicated on the Standard Detail sheets in the plans.


G. Poles and Pedestals: All poles and pedestals are to be installed as shown in the plans
and the Standard Detail sheets. All attachments are to be located in the field and all wire
entrances shall be drilled or punched in the field. All drilled or punched surfaces shall be
carefully reamed and/or deburred or threaded as appropriate before an application of one
field coat of cold galvanizing. The City Engineer shall confirm the location and mounting
heights of all pole and pedestal attachments located in the field. Should field adjustment of
any attachment be necessary after the Engineer confirms the locations, the Contractor shall
be responsible for plugging any holes caused by the initial installation. Hole plugging
methods shall be approved by the City Engineer. Mast arms on mast arm poles
shall be installed after the mast arm poles are erected. In some instances, and depending
upon the final locations of the signal poles, a short section of the mast arm(s) may need to be
cut off, as directed by the City Engineer, in order to accommodate varying field conditions.
H. Signal Heads: Signal heads shall be installed as shown on the plans and the Standard
Detail sheets. Signal head should be adjusted in the field such that a person standing on
the pavement, a distance of four times the speed limit (mph) in feet from the stop bar, shall
see the brightest image of the red section. The Engineer shall approve the location,
mounting and mounting height of all signal heads. Signal heads shall not be installed at
any intersection until all other signal equipment, including the controller, is in place and
ready for operation at that intersection, except that the signal heads may be mounted if the
faces are not directed toward traffic or if the faces are covered. All heads shall be plumbed
as viewed from the direction in which they face.
I. Alternative Loop Detectors: Loop detector installation shall conform to the details and
notes shown on the plans and the Standard Detail sheets. All loop conductors shall be
wound in the same direction with the start and end clearly marked on the conductors at
the junction or service box. Conductors of all loops shall run continuous to and from the
nearest junction or service box. The loop conductors for each loop shall be spliced in the
junction or service box to a detector lead-in cable running from the box to a sensor unit
mounted in the controller cabinet.
When construction of a loop is started, it shall be completed the same construction day.
Should the Contractor start a loop installation and fail to satisfactorily complete it, the entire
loop may be subject to replacement at the discretion of the Engineer. Construction of loops
shall only be started when the ambient air temperature is 40 ° F. (4.5° C.) and rising.
Saw cuts for loop wires shall be made with a self-propelled, water-cooled power saw. The
water is used to cool and lubricate the blade and eliminate blowing saw dust. Water shall
be provided by the Contractor. All jagged edges or sharp corners and protrusions shall be
removed using a small chisel and hammer. The saw cut shall be cleaned to remove cutting
dust, grit, oil and other contaminates. The saw cut and entire loop area shall be flushed
clean with water and dried with compressed dry air immediately after cutting. Care shall be
taken during the cutting and cleaning operation to avoid blowing debris at passing
pedestrians and vehicles or onto private property. All corners of loops will be drilled with
1.5 inch to 2 inch (38 mm x 50 mm) hole drill to the depth of saw cut, or corner cuts at 45
degree angles.
Wire shall be installed so as to minimize stress at corner locations. Wire shall be kept dry
when installing in the saw slot and shall be inserted by use of a blunt, preferably nonmetallic,
flat paddle.
After conductors are installed in the slots cut in the pavement, the slots shall be filled with
the approved sealant to within 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) of the pavement surface. The sealant
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 15
Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

shall be prepared and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


The sealant shall be between 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) thick above
the top conductor in the saw cut as determined by the saw cut depth and as indicated in the
plans. Before setting, surplus sealant shall be removed from the adjacent road surfaces
without the use of solvents. The Contractor shall allow time to let the sealant set before
opening the lane(s) to traffic. Approved absorbent material shall be spread over the sealant
if traffic is allowed over the loop before the sealant is completely set.
J. Detection System (Radar): The radar detection system and software shall be installed
according to the manufacturer’s requirements and the Contract Documents. The Engineer
shall be provided with a copy of the manufacturer’s written requirements. The radar
detection system configuration consists of the number of advanced radar detection units
and radar detection systems shown in the Contract Documents. The actual quantity and
proposed location of the equipment to be furnished, installed and made fully-functional as a
complete radar detection system by the Contractor is shown in the Contract Documents.
The supplier of the radar detection system shall supervise the installation and testing of the
radar and computer equipment. A factory-certified representative from the supplier must
be on-site during installation. In the event that the field-setup computer is provided by the
owner, the installation and testing shall be done at the time that training is conducted.
A two-year manufacturer’s warranty covering the entire Radar Detection System shall be
provided. The warranty period will begin upon acceptance of the radar detection system by
the Engineer. The warranty shall cover ongoing software support by the supplier to include
updates of the radar detection system processor unit, and supervisor software (if a field
setup computer is required for setup). These updates must be provided free of charge
during the warranty period. The supplier shall maintain a program for technical support and
software updates following expiration of the warranty period. This program shall be made
available to the owner in the form of a separate agreement for continuing support.
K. Traffic Signing: All aluminum sheeting signs shall be securely attached to the mast arm.
Signs shall be mounted to the mast arms using cable mounted Astro-Brackets or approved
equal. There shall be a minimum of two brackets per sign placed no more than 3 feet (1
meter) apart with a maximum of 1 foot (0.3 meters) from the edge of the sign.
The LED-illuminated sign shall be mounted to the mast arm using cable mounted Astro-
Brackets or approved equal. The sign shall be attached to the signal pole as shown
on the plans and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Overhead street
name signs shall generally be located on the mast arm between the vertical pole shaft
and the first through vehicle signal head on the mast arm. The sign shall be rigid mounted
with the sign centered approximately vertically on the mast arm, not mounted hanging
below it, and leveled horizontally. Color codes shall be followed so that the black insulated
conductor connects to the black power terminal, white to white, and green to green
located in the electrical access panel on the sign housing. The contractor shall drill a hole in
the bottom of the mast arm and insert a rubber grommet to protect the cable from cuts and
abrasions during the pulling operation. The cable shall run continuously through the mast
arm and the signal pole to the designated connection point as indicated in the plans. A
cable drip loop shall be provided at the point where the cable enters the bottom of the mast
arm. Signs shall be connected to street lighting circuits with breakaway fused and non-fused
fuse holders and multi-tap connectors as indicated in the standard details.
L. Traffic Signal Conduit: Traffic Signal Conduit shall be installed as shown in the plans, on
the Standard Detail sheets and in conformance with appropriate articles of the National
Electric Code and the National Electrical Safety Code.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 16


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Tracing wire shall be installed on the inside of all conduits to facilitate the locating of buried
cable. The wire shall be a no. 10 AWG stranded copper Type USE or THWN. The trace
wire shall be installed without splices. At each service or junction box, the trace wire shall
be bonded to a ground rod. The ends of all conduit shall be well-reamed to remove burrs
and rough edges. Field cuts shall be made square and true so that the ends will butt or come
together for the full diameter thereof.
An approved factory coupling shall be used for connection of the HDPE conduit to a 90°
factory PVC elbow or between two lengths of HDPE conduit. The coupling shall be of high
density polyethylene. The coupling shall have individual reverse-locking threads with a
built-in center stop. The ends of the conduit shall be grooved with a grooving tool to match
the reverse-locking threads of the coupling to provide for greater pull-out resistance. The
coupling shall be installed with a factory recommended coupling tool to ensure an airtight
and watertight lock.
Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than six times the
inside diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are not used, conduit bends shall be
made without crimping or flattening, using the longest radius practicable and utilizing an
appropriate conduit bending tool.
Conduit shall be installed under street pavement sections at a depth not less than 48 inches
(1200mm) below the bottom of the curb, and under other pavement sections at a depth not
less than 24 inches (600 mm); and where laid in trenches on shoulders and in park areas,
conduit shall be laid to a depth of 24 to 30 inches (600 to 750 mm) below natural ground
level or finish grade.
The conduit shall be installed continuous from outlet to outlet or as otherwise shown on the
plans. With respect to HDPE conduit, no couplings or joints will be allowed at intermediate
points unless approved by the Engineer in charge of construction. The conduit may be
directional bored to minimize disruption to the existing improvements or may be trenched.
Conduit shall be placed under existing pavement by approved pushing or drilling methods.
Pavement shall not be disturbed without the written permission of the Engineer and then
only in the event insurmountable obstructions are encountered. Pushing or drilling pits shall
be kept 2 feet (0.6 meters) clear of the edge of any type of pavement wherever possible.
Excessive use of water such that pavement might be undermined or subgrade softened, will
not be permitted.
Conduit set in concrete bases shall extend approximately 3 inches (75 mm) above the
foundation vertically. Conduit entering through the bottom of a junction box shall be located
near the ends to leave the major portion of the box clear. At all outlets, conduit shall enter
from the direction of the run.
HDPE conduit entering equipment shall be continuous into the service box, junction box
and control center. A factory 90° PVC conduit elbow shall be used for installation into a
control center foundation. At a traffic signal service box or junction box, the conduit shall
enter and exit the sides of the box tangentially such that the cable can enter, be coiled, and
exit without exceeding an 8-inch (205 mm) bending radius. For straight through
connections, the conduit shall enter one side of the box and exit the opposite side of the
box. For changes in direction, the conduit shall enter tangentially and exit tangentially at a
90° angle to the entrance.
Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be cleaned with a
mandrel and blown out with compressed air.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 17


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Conduit runs shown on the plans are for bidding purposes only and may be changed with
permission of the Engineer to avoid underground obstructions. The conduit shall generally
be installed parallel to the street lighting conduit or direct-buried cable. Installation in the
same trench is acceptable.
M. Signal Turn-On: The signal turn-on shall be performed by the Contractor, City personnel
shall be present at the activation. The Contractor shall be present for signal turn-on and be
prepared to respond to any technical difficulties that may be encountered due to
construction of the traffic signal. The signal turn-on shall not occur on Fridays, holidays or
weekends and shall be completed between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. unless
otherwise noted in the plans or directed by the Engineer. At locations without previous
traffic signal control, the new traffic signal shall flash for a period of at least two AM and two
PM peak hours prior to full signal system turn-on.
A signal operated independently of other signals or signal systems shall be tested as a
single installation. A signal operated as part of a system shall not be tested until all signals
in the system are ready to be tested. A system shall be tested as a unit. All traffic signal
installation elements shall function properly as a complete system for a minimum period of
thirty calendar days before acceptance by the City.
The thirty calendar day test period shall be continuous without malfunctions. Any
malfunction observed or recorded shall stop the test period as of the time of the malfunction
and the test period shall not resume until all components are satisfactorily operating.
The Contractor shall be present to assist and participate in inspections of the traffic signal
installation prior to final acceptance.
N. Improvement Policies: The work included in this project may involve modification of
existing traffic signal equipment at locations which are presently controlled by operating
traffic signals. If portions of the existing traffic installations are to be incorporated in the
proposed signal installations, the following policies are to be observed during the
installation of the proposed modifications and improvements:
1. Signal Kept in Operation: The existing signal controls shall be kept in operation during
installation of the proposed signal modifications and improvements, except for
shutdowns to allow for alterations as required for installation of the proposed
improvements.
2. Periodic Disruptions: Some periods of disruption to existing signal operations can be
tolerated during installation of the proposed improvements or final removal of existing.
However, the Contractor shall coordinate planned disruptions of signal operations with
the City Engineer at least two (2) days, excluding weekends and city holidays, prior to
operational shutdown of any traffic signal Any malfunction of an existing signal resulting
from the Contractor’s operation, regardless of the nature of work, shall be corrected
at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining
adequate traffic control during any period of disruption to the existing signal.
3. Wiring Identification: All existing wiring within existing controller cabinets shall be
identified by the Contractor and each conductor properly labeled prior to de-energizing
the existing controller to install the proposed modifications and improvements.
4. Planned Disruptions: Planned disruptions of signal operations shall be restricted during
off-peak time periods as directed by the Engineer. The signal controls shall be operable
during all other periods.
All existing salvageable equipment (i.e. signal heads, luminaires, poles, arms,

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 18


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

controllers and cabinets) in excess of the requirements of this project shall be


completely removed from the project, and the Contractor shall deliver same equipment
to the City of Shawnee Public Works Department. All new equipment purchased as
spare parts under the requirements of this project shall be delivered new and
undamaged to the City of Shawnee Public Works Department, and stockpiled as per
the instructions of the City Engineer. The Contractor shall exercise care in the
removal and delivery of any existing or new equipment to be delivered to the City. All
non-salvaged items of existing equipment shall become the property of the Contractor.
All concrete bases removed on this project shall be broken up and removed to a depth
of twenty-four (24) inches (0.6 meters) below grade. Holes resulting from this operation
shall be filled to the proper grade with suitable material approved by the Engineer.
O. Excavations and Backfilling: Backfill shall be performed in accordance with Section 4125
– Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling.
P. Sodding: Sod shall be placed in accordance with Section 4120 –
Seeding and Sod
Q. Testing: The Contractor is responsible for testing the completed traffic signal system and
for contacting the Engineer to request City inspections.
R. Maintenance Work: The Contractor is responsible for making all repairs and replacements
regardless of the cause or responsible party, until the entire system is completed, inspected
and accepted by the City.
S. Restoration of Right-of-Way: All disturbed surfaces within the City’s Right-of-Way shall be
restored to its original condition. The Contractor is responsible for taking the appropriate
measures to restore all surfaces disturbed as a result of the Traffic Signal work. The
restoration of such surfaces should be approved by the City Engineer prior to final project
acceptance.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 METHODS OF MEASUREMENT


The traffic signal installation as indicated on the plans, complete-in-place and accepted, will be
measured as a unit lump sum quantity for all work necessary.

4.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT


The traffic signal installation, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract lump
sum price bid, which price shall be full compensation for furnishing all equipment, materials, and
all other work necessary or incidental to the construction of the complete traffic signal installation
and for all equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

END OF SECTION

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 19


Section 4510 Traffic Signals Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4500 TRAFFIC DEVICES

SECTION 4515 – Fiber Optic Cable

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment for the installation of
fiber opt ic cable as shown on the plans and as indicated in the following specifications, or
as directed by the City Engineer. All incidental parts which are not shown on the plans or
specified herein and which are necessary to complete fiber optic cable installation shall be
furnished and installed as though such parts were shown on the plans referenced herein.

1.2 ADMINISTRATION
A. Materials: A complete list of pre-approved materials can be found in the Design and
Construction Manual (SDCM) located on the Department page of the City of Shawnee’s
website at: www.cityofshawnee.org or by contacting the Public Works Department.
B. Permits: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining right of way permitting and agreements
from the City’s Public Works Department prior to installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
Before commencing the installation of any material or equipment, the Contractor shall submit
one electronic copy of complete shop drawings for manufactured materials and equipment to
the Engineer for approval in pdf format. Manufacturers’ bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive
data that contain cuts, dimensions, specifications and wiring diagrams will be acceptable for
standard cataloged equipment. Such bulletins, leaflets and other descriptive data shall be clearly
marked to show the item to be used to satisfy a required item in the schedule of materials shown
on the Plans, or as specified in the Special Provisions. Shop Drawings should be certified by
the manufacturer to be in conformance with the project plans and specifications including
conformance with all material specifications. The City Engineer may require other descriptive
data, drawings, and diagrams for non-cataloged equipment or materials. In the event any items
of material or equipment contained on the shop drawings fail to comply with the specification
requirements, such items may be rejected by the City Engineer. Orders for material and
equipment shall not be placed until written approval is obtained from the City Engineer.
All submittals shall include the manufacturer brand name and part number where applicable.
Where more than one item is present on a submittal sheet, the appropriate item or items shall
be circled, not highlighted. All submittals shall be organized as much as practical in order with
the summary of quantities sheet in the plans. New submittals on rejected items shall be
supplied to the Engineer for approval. If shop drawings are required to be submitted as a result
of proposed field modifications of a structure, a registered Professional Engineer shall seal those
shop drawings prior to submittal to the City.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise noted in the plans, all equipment, materials and incidental parts shall be new
Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 1
Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

and of similar manufacturer. The cost of incidental materials not mentioned in the Plans shall
be included in the traffic signal installation lump sum bid price.
A. Fiber Optic Cable: The fiber supplied shall consist of 144 strands for main lines and 48
strands for stubs. The fiber manufacturer shall be Corning or AFL Telecommunications. The
fiber shall include a gel-filled loose buffer tube, water-blocking system, single all-dielectric
(non-metallic) armored sheath, and single mode 8.3/125 micron fiber.

B. Conduit: The size of the conduit used shall be a minimum of 2 inches. It shall be the
privilege of the Contractor, at his own expense, to use larger size conduit if desired. Where
larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of the run from outlet to outlet.
No reducing couplings will be permitted.
All conduit used for fiber optic cable installations shall be Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 high
density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit as indicated on the plans. Conduit runs under the
roadway shall use Schedule 80 conduit.
1. HDPE Conduit Material: Flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be 2” Schedule 40, high-
density polyethylene conduit (HDPE). The conduit shall be smooth walled inside and
out. The conduit shall be gray in color, and equipped with a rot and mildew resistant
polypropylene pull rope. The conduit shall be manufactured to ASTM D2447 and NEMA
TC7 specifications and shall meet the following applicable requirements:

Minimum Wall Thickness: 2” Schedule 40 – 0.154”


Tensile Strength: 3,300 psi ASTM D-638
Elongation: >800% ASTM D-638
Density: 60 lbs/cu. ft. ASTM D-1505
Melt Index: 0.011 oz./10 min. ASTM D-1238(E)
Brittle Temp.: <-103º F. ASTM D-746ESCR (Bell
>1500 F50 hrs. Test): ASTM D-1693(C)

Rockwell Hardness: L 49 ASTM D-785


Shore Hardness : D 61 ASTM D-2240

C. Service Boxes: All service boxes shall be fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete boxes of
the size and shape as shown on the Standard Detail sheet in the accompanying plans.
Service box material shall be an aggregate consisting of sand and gravel bound together
with a polymer and reinforced with continuous woven glass strands. The material must
have the following mechanical properties:

Compressive Strength 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa)


Tensile Strength 1,700 psi (11,722 kPa)
Flexural Strength 7,500 psi (51,713 kPa)

Service boxes with adjustable top ring may be permitted if approved by the Engineer.
Junction boxes shall be either Type I or Type II as shown on the plans and shall be
fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete of a size and shape as indicated on the Standard

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 2


Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Detail sheet in the accompanying plans. Junction box material to be an aggregate consisting
of sand and gravel bound together with a polymer and reinforced with continuous woven glass
strands. The material must have the following mechanical properties:

Compressive Strength 20,000 psi (137,895 kPa)


Tensile Strength 1,700 psi (11,722 kPa)
Flexural Strength 7,500 psi (51,713 kPa)

Covers for pull boxes to be used for fiber optics shall be embossed with “FIBER OPTICS”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notification: The Contractor shall contact the Public Works Department prior to
construction to set up a pre-construction meeting in the field.
B. Schedule: Before commencing the installation of the traffic signal installation, a complete
schedule of materials and equipment proposed for installation shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. This schedule shall include catalog cuts, diagrams, drawings, and
other such descriptive data that may be required by the Engineer.
C. Pre-Construction Meeting: A pre-construction conference shall be held with the Contractor
and the City Engineer as directed by the City Engineer. During this meeting, a copy of
the City’s most current pre-approved list shall be furnished to the Contractor. At the earliest
possible time all electrical conduit, service boxes, pole foundations and junction boxes shall
be installed at the correct grade.
D. Utilities: No new fixture shall be constructed as part of this contract which is in conflict with
any existing utility facility, or the code required thereby, unless approved by the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall be installed at 750-1000 foot intervals, as shown on the plans
and on the Standard Detail sheets and at such additional points as the Contractor, at his
own expense and with the approval of the Engineer, may desire to facilitate the work.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all pull boxes shall be installed level to 1 inch
(25 mm) above the finish grade. Provide minimum 100 feet of fiber optical cable slack via
cable storage at every pull box.

B. Excavation: The Contractor shall perform all excavations for installing underground
conduits, cable, boxes and pole bases in whatever substances encountered, to the depths
indicated on the drawings or as approved. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling
shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the excavation to avoid slides.
Excavated materials shall be kept off sidewalks and out of the street where possible. The
Contractor shall pile excavated materials such that drivers' visibility will not be obstructed.
All excavated materials not required or unsuitable for backfill shall be removed and
wasted on a site obtained by the Contractor. Excavations and trenches shall not be larger
or wider than necessary for the proper installation of the foundations or electrical
appliance. Excavation shall not be performed until immediately before the installation of
conduit, bases or other appliances. All excess excavated material shall be removed at the

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 3


Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

earliest possible time, by the end of the same working day, or as directed by the City Engineer.
All areas excavated shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with these
Specifications. Backfill shall be deposited in not over 6 inch (150 mm) layers and tamped to
95 percent density +3 percent of optimum moisture. The top 6 inches (150 mm) of backfill
shall be select soil suitable for sod. All areas excavated shall be backfilled at the earliest
possible time or as directed by the Engineer. After backfilling, all disturbed areas shall be
kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and well drained condition until permanent
repairs are made. Where trenches are excavated in established sod areas, the area shall
be backfilled the same day excavation occurs. Approved methods are intended to reduce
damage to the established sod area.

C. Conduit: Tracing wire shall be installed on the inside of all conduits to facilitate the locating
of buried cable. The wire shall be a no. 10 AWG stranded copper Type USE or THWN.
The trace wire shall be installed without splices. At each service or junction box, the trace
wire shall be bonded to a ground rod. The ends of all conduit shall be well-reamed to
remove burrs and rough edges. Field cuts shall be made square and true so that the ends
will butt or come together for the full diameter thereof.
An approved factory coupling shall be used for connection of the HDPE conduit to a 90°
factory PVC elbow or between two lengths of HDPE conduit. The coupling shall be of high
density polyethylene. The coupling shall have individual reverse-locking threads with a
built-in center stop. The ends of the conduit shall be grooved with a grooving tool to match
the reverse-locking threads of the coupling to provide for greater pull-out resistance. The
coupling shall be installed with a factory recommended coupling tool to ensure an airtight
and watertight lock.
Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than six times the
inside diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are not used, conduit bends shall be
made without crimping or flattening, using the longest radius practicable and utilizing an
appropriate conduit bending tool.
Conduit shall be installed under street pavement sections at a depth not less than 48 inches
(1200mm) below the bottom of the curb, and under other pavement sections at a depth not
less than 24 inches (600 mm); and where laid in trenches on shoulders and in park areas,
conduit shall be laid to a depth of 24 to 30 inches (600 to 750 mm) below natural ground
level or finish grade.
The conduit shall be installed continuous from outlet to outlet or as otherwise shown on the
plans. With respect to HDPE conduit, no couplings or joints will be allowed at intermediate
points unless approved by the Engineer in charge of construction. The conduit may be
directional bored to minimize disruption to the existing improvements or may be trenched.
Conduit shall be placed under existing pavement by approved pushing or drilling methods.
Pavement shall not be disturbed without the written permission of the Engineer and then
only in the event insurmountable obstructions are encountered. Pushing or drilling pits shall
be kept 2 feet (0.6 meters) clear of the edge of any type of pavement wherever possible.
Excessive use of water such that pavement might be undermined or subgrade softened, will
not be permitted.
Conduit set in concrete bases shall extend approximately 3 inches (75 mm) above the
foundation vertically. Conduit entering through the bottom of a junction box shall be located
near the ends to leave the major portion of the box clear. At all outlets, conduit shall enter
from the direction of the run.

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 4


Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

HDPE conduit entering equipment shall be continuous into the service box, junction box
and control center. A factory 90° PVC conduit elbow shall be used for installation into a
control center foundation. At a traffic signal service box or junction box, the conduit shall
enter and exit the sides of the box tangentially such that the cable can enter, be coiled, and
exit without exceeding an 8-inch (205 mm) bending radius. For straight through
connections, the conduit shall enter one side of the box and exit the opposite side of the
box. For changes in direction, the conduit shall enter tangentially and exit tangentially at a
90° angle to the entrance.
Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be cleaned with a
mandrel and blown out with compressed air.
Conduit runs shown on the plans are for bidding purposes only and may be changed with
permission of the Engineer to avoid underground obstructions. The conduit shall generally
be installed parallel to the street lighting conduit or direct-buried cable. Installation in the
same trench is acceptable.

D. Fiber Installation
A. Fiber Slack - Underground - Provide minimum 100’-0” of optical fiber slack at every hand
holes/pull box.

C. Maintain a rot and mildew resistant pull cord in all conduit and raceway used. Maintain, at
minimum one (1) pull string throughout conduit system(s).

D. Maintain continuous jacket integrity on all cabling up to the outlet.

E. Install all cabling according to BICSI cabling standards and practices.

F. No fiber field splices will be permitted. Building terminations/splices only.

G. Install cabling to manufacturer-specified sag and tension.

H. Pulling Tension Limits of the fiber. Contractor shall install/pull the fiber in a manner to not
exceed manufacturer’s maximum tension limits. When machinery is required to install/pull
the cable into the conduit, tension meters will be required to insure manufacturer maximum
tension limits are not exceeded.

I. Bring to the attention of the Owner and Engineer conflicts between manufacturer’s
instructions and Construction Documents.

J. Unless otherwise stated, where installation requirements identified in drawings and


specifications conflict with the manufacturer’s recommendations, the more restrictive
standard shall apply.

ENTRANCE FACILITY (EF) TERMINATIONS


A. GENERAL - The entrance facility consists of all conduit, cabinets, racks, backboards,
patch panels, punch blocks, fiber optic panels, cable tray, support hardware, cable
management hardware, patch cords, cross connects, terminations, and labeling for use in
rooms designated as the central termination location and distribution point for backbone
and/or horizontal cabling for a facility.

B. When required, OSP cable entering a building must be placed in plenum rated Inner-duct

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 5


Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

to meet fire codes.

E. Excavations and Backfilling: Backfill shall be performed in accordance with Section 4125
– Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling.
F. Sodding: Sod shall be placed in accordance with Section 4120 –
Seeding and Sod
G. Testing:
A. MDF to MDF TIA-568-C testing. All testing is to be compared to industry cabling or channel
application standards to ensure that it meets the requirements. PASS or FAIL requirement. A
passing measurement meets or exceeds the minimum requirements for fiber reliability and
integrity in accordance with industry standards.
B. TIA-568-C Tier 1 Testing - ensure quality network performance and integrity. Tier 1 testing
shall consists of:
Verifying the cable length.
Verifying polarity.
Measuring overall fiber link attenuation to ensure that it is less than the specified loss budget.
C. TIA-568-C Tier 2 Testing The use of an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) for system
troubleshooting, verification and documentation is an important step of the system installation
process.

H. Maintenance Work: The Contractor is responsible for making all repairs and replacements
regardless of the cause or responsible party, until the entire system is completed, inspected
and accepted by the City.
I. Restoration of Right-of-Way: All disturbed surfaces within the City’s Right-of-Way shall be
restored to its original condition. The Contractor is responsible for taking the appropriate
measures to restore all surfaces disturbed as a result of the Traffic Signal work. The
restoration of such surfaces should be approved by the City Engineer prior to final project
acceptance.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.01 Fiber Optic Cable


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Linear Foot
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price.

END OF SECTION

Division 4500 Traffic Devices 4510 - 6


Section 4515 Fiber Optic Cable 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 4605 – GUARDRAIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the furnishing of materials and installation of guardrail.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE
All proprietary systems are required to be prequalified through KDOT as per the conditions
outlined in KDOT Section 1618.

1.03 REFERENCES
KDOT Standard Specifications:
1. Section 827 Guardrail and Guideposts
2. Section 1618 Steel Plate Guardrail
3. Section 1800 Painted Materials and Mixed Paints
4. Section 2300 Timber, Lumber, Piling and Posts

1.04 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, and samples shall be submitted by Contractor in
accordance with the submittal requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Guardrail: Guardrail plates, end terminal systems, and accessories shall conform to KDOT
Section 1618.
B. Posts: Unless otherwise noted within the Construction Documents, new installations shall
be steel posts and blocks that meet the requirements of KDOT Section 1618.
If wood posts are specified in the Construction Documents, the wood posts shall meet the
requirements of KDOT Section 2300.
Posts and blocks for repair or extension of existing guardrail shall match existing posts in
type and finish; and shall be painted if necessary to meet this requirement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Storage: Store all galvanized rail elements, end sections, and accessories to prevent
galvanic action. Do not store in direct contact with the soil. Material may be stored in the
open, provided it is properly separated, stacked, and drained.
Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4605 - 1
Section 4605 Guardrail 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Protect galvanized surfaces which have been abraded exposing the base metal, threaded
portion so of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts from moisture, soil, or other
damaging elements.

Contractor is responsible for the condition of the material in storage.


B. Damaged Coating: Galvanized material with damaged coating shall be rejected, or if the
Engineer determines the damage is minor, shall be repaired in accordance with KDOT
Section 1800.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Posts: Excavate holes for guardrail posts and guideposts to the required depth. Excavate
holes to permit compaction of the backfill around the posts.
1. If allowed by the Engineer, guardrail posts and guideposts may be set by driving in lieu
of excavation. Post caps designed to protect the post from detrimental crushing shall be
used during driving operations. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the post or shoulder is
being damaged, or unacceptable line and grade is obtained, the Contractor shall
excavate for the erection of the posts.
2. Posts shall be set plumb, firm, and true to the lines and grade established. The backfill
around the posts shall be placed in thin layers and thoroughly compacted. The top of
the backfill shall be of the same material that is used in the construction of the shoulders
and the thickness shall be at least equal to the thickness of the shoulder at that point
unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
B. Assembly: Guardrail, cables, plates, shapes, fittings, and end terminals shall be placed and
fastened in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the Construction
Documents.
C. Removal: Guardrail shall be carefully disassembled and guard posts shall be dug out or
pulled in a manner that will prevent undue injury to the fence, fittings, and posts. The material
shall be stored in neat piles at an accessible location on the project approved by the Engineer
and shall remain the property of the City. Galvanized pieces shall be stored as indicated
above.
D. Reconstruction: Guardrail and accessories to be reused shall be stored at an acceptable
location. The reconstruction of guardrail shall conform to the methods described above for
the construction of new guardrail. All steel plates and fittings for steel plated guardrail
required to be reset or reconstructed shall be given two coats of field paint in accordance
with KDOT Section 1800 after resetting or reconstruction, unless otherwise designated within
the Construction Documents.
Guardrail which is removed and is reused on the project shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
asphalt material, paint, mud, dirt and other debris prior to erection. The guardrail shall be
punched or drilled so as to accommodate the revised post spacing as indicated within the
Construction Documents.
E. Cutting: When guardrail is required to be cut, the cut shall be made by sawing. All such
holes and cuts shall be treated with zinc dust paint in accordance with KDOT Section 1800
so as to prevent rusting.

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4605 - 2


Section 4605 Guardrail 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 GUARDRAIL
A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Linear Feet, each separate run of guardrail shall be measured from center of end post
to center of end post along the rail. Terminal devices, as specified within the Construction
Documents, shall be measured per each terminal device.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price for both guardrail and end
terminal devices.

END OF SECTION

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4605 - 3


Section 4605 Guardrail 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 4610 – HANDRAIL AND GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the furnishing of materials and installation of handrail.

1.02 REFERENCES
KDOT Standard Specifications:
A. Section 721 Handrail for Bridges and Other Uses
B. Section 1600 Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals
2018 International Building Code:
A. Section 1014 Handrails
B. Section 1015 Guards

1.03 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, and samples shall be submitted by Contractor in
accordance with the submittal requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Handrail: Materials used for construction of handrail shall comply with KDOT Section 1600.
B. Finish: Handrails shall be finished with a powder coat process after fabrication. The powder
coating color shall be black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 STORAGE
Handrail materials shall be stored above ground on platforms or skids with spacer blocks to keep
the members separate. Protect the stored materials from contaminants and moisture until
properly installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Connection: Handrail connection shall be completed utilizing a preset sleeve, core drilling,
or flush mount with anchor bolts, at the Contractor’s option. Anchor bolts shall be set with a
template to insure proper alignment. The portion of the anchor bolt exposed above the finish
line of the concrete shall be suitably protected during placement of the concrete.
B. Assembly: Handrail shall be erected in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the Construction Documents.
Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4610 - 1
Section 4610 Handrail Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

Before erecting the handrail, true the concrete surface where the posts will rest. Grind the
concrete surface for seating, when required.
Erect the handrail by groups of posts corresponding to the length of each rail piece. Fully
support handrail by posts at the time of placement. The maximum deviation allowed from
the correct alignment is 1/8-inch. Abrupt breaks in alignment shall be corrected. Drifting of
holes during assembly is permitted only to bring the parts into position. Do not enlarge the
holes or distort the metal. Use beveled washers on beveled surfaces to give full bearing to
both the head and nut. After the handrail is erected, align and tighten the nuts on the anchor
bolts.
Erect handrail to line and grade using surveying instruments. Shim the handrail posts as
required. For shims 1/8-inch or greater, use either steel or sheet lead shims. Only use one
(1) shim per post.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 HANDRAIL
A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Linear Feet. Handrail shall be measured from center of end post to center of end post
to the nearest tenth (1/10) of a foot.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price.

END OF SECTION

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4610 - 2


Section 4610 Handrail Revised 2022
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 4615 – TREE WELL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section covers the furnishing of material and installation of tree wells.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, and samples shall be submitted by Contractor in
accordance with the submittal requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. KDOT Standard Specifications
1. Section 1104 – Aggregates for Aggregate Base Construction
2. Section 1107 – Aggregates for Backfill
B. ASTM C1372-17 – Standard Specification for Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Mortar: Mortar shall be 1 part masonry cement, 1 part Portland cement, and 6 parts
commercially produced masonry sand. Sufficient water shall be added to the make the
mortar workable and plastic.
B. Filter Fabric: nonwoven geotextile fabric composed of polypropylene fibers; Mirafi 140 N
C. Drainage Aggregate: KDOT UD-1
D. Concrete Leveling Pad: lean concrete with 28-day compressive between 800 -1,000 psi
E. Granular Leveling Pad: KDOT AB-3
F. Stone: sound, native Kansas limestone uniform in color and texture, and free from foreign
matter and defects detrimental to appearance and durability; job excavated stone in
compliance with the above requirements.
G. Modular Concrete Units: ASTM C1372-17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Timing: Tree wells shall be constructed no later than thirty (30) days prior to placing
embankment around the tree, or excavating adjacent to the drip line.

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4615 - 1


Section 4615 Tree Well 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

B. Tree Maintenance:
1. Following excavation, all tree roots that are exposed or damaged shall be trimmed
cleanly, and covered with moist peat moss, burlap, or other suitable material to keep
roots from drying out. Tree maintenance items described above shall be completed by,
or under the supervision, of a qualified arborist.
2. Contractor shall apply fertilizer and water thoroughly. Fertilizer shall be applied in
accordance with Section 4120 – Seeding and Sod
3. Water shall be applied at the rate of one (1) inch per day for the first twenty (20) days
after the excavation. After the first twenty (20) days the Contractor shall apply water as
needed. Contractor is responsible for maintenance of the tree until acceptable by the
City.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. STONES
1. Placement:
(a) Stones shall be laid in mortar with all spaces between the stones completely filled
and with the stones carefully settled in the mortar beds before the mortar has set.
(b) Shape the stones before placing in the tree well. Dressing or hammering on the
stones is not allowed after they are placed in the tree well.
(c) Clean each stone and saturate it with water before setting the stone in mortar.
Settle each stone into place in a full bed of mortar. Construct the retaining wall with
full-mortared joints one (1) to one and one half (1 ½) inches thick. Arrange the
vertical joints to break a minimum of six (6) with those in adjoining courses. Do no
locate vertical joints above or below a header.
(d) Construct the tree well with headers to tie the masonry together. Arrange the
header to occupy at least 1/4 of the surface area on the face and back of the
retaining wall. Distribute the headers evenly throughout the tree well.
(e) Place the larger stones at the bottom of the masonry wall and the thickness of the
stones shall decrease from the bottom of the wall to the top.
(f) Construct the masonry in a workmanlike manner and the top of the wall shall fit the
embankment slope.
2. Cold Weather: Refer to Section 4405 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for cold weather
limitations.
3. Finishing:
(a) Protect the mortar from the direct rays of the sun and cure for three days with wet
burlap or wet cotton mats.
(b) Use a pointing tool to finish the exposed joints. If the exposed joints are not pointed
before the mortar sets, rake the exposed joints to an approximate depth of one and
one half (1 ½) inches. Thoroughly wet the raked area, pack the wetted area with
fresh mortar and finish the joint with a pointing tool.
(c) After the mortar is set, clean and remove all excess mortar from the joints and
surface of the stones.

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4615 - 2


Section 4615 Tree Well 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

B. MODULAR CONCRETE UNITS


1. Modular concrete units shall be constructed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
2. All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that interferes with proper
placement or impairs the strength or performance of the wall.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 TREE WELL


A. Method of Measurement: Field Measured
B. Unit: Square feet. Tree well shall be measured per exposed front face from finish grade to
top of wall.
C. Payment: Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price. Tree maintenance, excavation,
backfill, grout, labor and other appurtenant work shall be subsidiary to tree well.

END OF SECTION

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4615 - 3


Section 4615 Tree Well 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

DIVISION 4600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 4620 – STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

– GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
This section includes demolition of residential or commercial structures indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS


A. City of Shawnee, Kansas
B. Kansas Department of Health and Environment (KDHE)
C. United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
D. United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (USOSHA)

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. Contractor Qualifications. An experienced firm with a successful record of performance in
completing demolition projects of similar scope and complexity, and possessing a valid
Johnson County (Kansas) Contractor’s License.
B. Abatement Subcontractor Qualifications. Subcontractor for removal/abatement of hazardous
materials shall be regularly engaged in this type of activity, familiar with regulations governing
the work, successfully completed removal/abatement projects of similar scope and
complexity, and the necessary staff and equipment to complete the work.
C. Applicable Regulations. Contractor shall complete the Work in accordance with applicable
local, state, and federal regulations including hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1.04 PERMITS
Contractor shall obtain and pay for all applicable local, state, and federal permits required for
the Work. No fees will be charged to Contractor for City issued permits

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-Demolition Photographs. Prior to beginning the Work, Contractor shall submit digital pre-
demolition photographs indicating existing conditions of adjacent construction and site
improvements not scheduled for demolition. Photographs shall be 24-bit color quality or better
.JPEG format.
B. Reporting Requirements. Contractor shall provide copies to City of all permits, reports, and
other documentation required to be submitted to local, state, and federal agencies having
jurisdictional authority.
C. Utility Shut-Off Certifications. Contractor shall submit copies to City of all utility shut-off
certifications issued by utility companies indicating utility service has been properly
disconnected from the structure.

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4620 - 1


Section 4620 - Structure Demolition 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


Prior to commencement of Work at the site, a pre-demolition meeting shall be conducted at a
mutually agreed time to review procedures and discuss coordination issues.

1.07 INSPECTIONS
Representatives of the City, independent testing laboratories, Special Inspectors, and
governmental agencies with jurisdictional authority shall have access to the Work at reasonable
times for their observations, testing, and inspections. Contractor shall provide proper and safe
conditions for such access. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all required
inspections. Special Inspections required for the Work will be paid by the City.

– PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

- EXECUTION

3.01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT


Hazardous materials abatement shall be completed by Contractor. Hazardous materials
inventory report prepared by City is included in the appendix of the specifications.

3.02 VECTOR EXTERMINATION


Contractor shall hire an exterminator for removal of all rodents prior to start of demolition
activities.

3.03 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP


City has removed all salvageable and recyclable materials from the structure. Remaining
materials are the property of Contractor.

3.04 EXAMINATION
Contractor shall carefully examine the site and the structure to be demolished and become
familiar with the physical conditions and restrictions relating to the demolition.

3.05 NOTICES
A. Contractor shall issue all required notices to property owners or other parties on, or in the
vicinity, of the site.
B. Contractor shall notify authorities having jurisdiction of all lane closures, road closures, and
detours.

3.06 TRAFFIC CONTROL


All barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices in public rights-of-way shall be installed
and maintained by the Contractor in conformity with the requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4620 - 2


Section 4620 - Structure Demolition 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.07 UTILITY DISCONNECTS


Contractor shall locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap existing utilities serving the structure
in accordance with utility company requirements. Demolition shall not start until all utility shut-off
certifications issued by the utility companies have been delivered to the City.

3.08 SITE PREPARATION


A. Prior to beginning demolition activities, Contractor shall install and maintain temporary safety
controls including, but not limited to, walkways, fences, railings, and canopies to protect
adjacent buildings and structures from damage and to ensure public safety.
B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary interior and exterior bracing, shoring, or
other structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse
of the structure being demolished or adjacent structures on or off the site.
C. Temporary sediment control measures shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor.
D. Contractor shall protect existing trees to be saved by installing effective barricades around
the dripline of the tree.
E. Stockpile existing topsoil and spread on areas disturbed by demolition operations prior to site
restoration activities.

3.09 DECONSTRUCTION
A. General.
1. Dust Control. Contractor shall provide effective dust control by sprinkling water or other
dust suppressants. Dust control must be sufficient to prevent visible emissions.
2. Noise Control. Control noise from demolition operations in compliance with local noise
ordinances.
B. Structures. Demolish structures and appurtenances indicated on the Drawings in an orderly
manner.
C. Impervious Surfaces. Remove all impervious surfaces indicated on the Drawings. The drive
approach within the street right-of-way shall remain in-place.
D. Foundation. Complete removal is required of all footings, foundation walls, and basement
floor slabs.
E. Cistern. If indicated on the Drawings, remove existing cistern.
F. Septic Tank. If indicated on the Drawings, remove or abandon in-place existing septic tank
and lateral fields in accordance with applicable regulations.
G. Water Well. If indicated on the Drawings, abandon existing water well in accordance with
applicable regulations.

3.10 REPAIRS
Contractor shall promptly repair all damage caused by demolition operations.

3.11 SITE CLEAN-UP


Contractor shall keep the site clean, neat, and orderly at all times and shall not allow waste
materials to accumulate on-site. Immediately after construction operations are complete, all
equipment and waste materials shall be removed from the site. Clean roadways of debris
caused by debris transport.
Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4620 - 3
Section 4620 - Structure Demolition 2022 Edition
Shawnee Design and Construction Manual Volume IV – Construction Specifications

3.12 WASTE DISPOSAL


Contractor shall transport all waste material off-site in a manner that will prevent spillage and
legally dispose. Contractor shall not burn or bury waste materials on-site

3.13 SITE RESTORATION


A. Below-Grade Areas. Backfill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition
operations in accordance with Section 4125 – Excavating, Trenching, and Backfilling of the
City of Shawnee standard construction specifications.
B. Grading. Grade site as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Sod. Sod all areas disturbed by demolition operations in accordance with Section 4120 –
Seeding and Sod of the City of Shawnee standard construction specifications.

– MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION


A. Unit: Lump Sum
B. Method of Measurement: Estimated percent complete in the field.
C. Payment: Structure demolition shall be paid at the lump sum price indicated in the Bid
Proposal and shall include, but not limited to, acquisition of permits, installation and
maintenance of temporary facilities, site preparation, utility disconnects, demolition, waste
removal and disposal, and clean-up.

4.02 SOD
Measurement and payment for sod shall be made in accordance with Section 4120 – Seeding
and Sod of the City of Shawnee standard construction specifications.

END OF SECTION

Division 4600 Incidental Construction 4620 - 4


Section 4620 - Structure Demolition 2022 Edition

You might also like